Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-294 (24)
IR Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Pit Northampton, Massachusetts Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION ew ELECTRICAL 16100-23 me Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 no Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts "" D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than .. the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction .� boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES .w A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned .► above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. .., E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. .. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical ELECTRICAL 16100-22 '" Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. C. A record of the test results. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusett s Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. ELECTRICAL 16100-21 ■M Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 op Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts "o structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. ON 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide me maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. .. P. Wiring 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30%fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits .� exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4"minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. h. Bend radius 5. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 6. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 7. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. 8. Wiring to the 2nd and 3rd floor data outlets shall be required to route through the attic and be fed down through the walls. Q. Acceptance Testing 1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. „ R. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. ELECTRICAL 16100-20 '"' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 "Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 1000 Category 6 Cabling". 2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the IDF in the telecommunications room to the telecommunication wall outlet in the work area against the "Permanent Link" performance limits specification as defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 standard. 3. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. L. Grounding 1. All equipment racks, housings,and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn,will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. Grounding shall conform to ANSI TIA/EIA-607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, National Electrical Code@), ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements as minimum. M. Labeling 1. Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standards. 2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high characters, in the following locations: w a. Inside receptacle box at the work area. b. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block. 3. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in a protective cover at each telecommunications closet location that is specific to the facilities terminated therein. 4. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA- 606-A standard color codes for termination blocks. 5. Labels shall be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 6. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, and punch blocks with room number in which outlet is located, followed by a single letter suffix to indicate particular outlet within room, i.e., S2107A, S2107B. Indicate riser cables by an R then pair or cable number. N. Field Quality Control 1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring) 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, ELECTRICAL 16100-19 4. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 .m Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Im G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category 6, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A 1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 ohm balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 6 cables with four individually twisted-pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission performance specifications in ANSI1TIA/EIA-568-13.2-1 up to 250 MHz. 2. Wall Plates and Connectors a. Single-gang faceplate with two openings containing the following devices: 1. Data Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 6, unkeyed, black, pinned to either T568(A or B)standards. 2. Voice Outlet-8-pin modular, category 3, unkeyed, ivory, pinned to either T568(A or B)standards. 3. Data Jack Modules a. Eight position modules shall be used in all work areas and modular patch panels and shall meet the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standard. Modules shall be tested and approved for Category 6 ETL component compliance. The module termination to 4 pair 24 —22 AWG 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. All modules shall be 100% tested for NEXT performance. The termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for .., pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. .� 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. .� b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. ,. 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. K. Testing of Data Cables ELECTRICAL 16100-18 "" Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. Hand written directories will not be acceptable. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOD for 208Y/120 volts, or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse, or ITE. 2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. C. New dual outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1)for data, (1)for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. Data only locations as shown on the drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box and cover plates, with 3 ports; (1) for data, and (2) for future expansion. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. + * E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Tele/Data backboard located in the basement. Each Data outlet drop shall consist of (1) data drop, run from each outlet location to the Tele/Data backboard. on ELECTRICAL 16100-17 M Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 .� Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .. being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the"OFF"position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. *■ 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC, as shown. 5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures, or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. .. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit " module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three- position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. ., b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for the service. E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. 2.11 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as indicated on the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped .w with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the ELECTRICAL 16100-16 an to Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state low harmonic electronic type, approvable for use on their system by Massachusetts Electric Co. Department. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. on C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T8 lamps shall be 3500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect. 2.9 LIGHTING CONTROLS A. Where shown on the construction documents, furnish and install complete limited 4 zone control system to provide multi-point control lighting. Low voltage remote control stations to be installed where shown and allow for 4 preset lighting schemes, off, and dimming controls. 1. Field Mounted System Components to be Lutron Grafix Eye GX-4000 compatable, or approved equivalent system. a. Main(master control) Unit to be Lutron Grafix Eye GRX-3104-T-WH. b. Low-voltage remote controller to be Lutron SG-4SIRI-WH-EGN C. Single pole switching power module to be Lutron PHPM-SW-DV-WH d. Single pole dimming power module to be Lutron PHPM-PA-120-WH d. Multi pole dimming power module to be Lutron HP-4 series 2. Submit complete point-to-point riser diagram showing complete control system layout including all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors and devices. Include original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. 2.10 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of ELECTRICAL 16100-15 .r Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 ■. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Monitor Module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as shown on plans for monitoring of all water-flow, tamper, and supervisory devices. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. E. Installation 1. Installation shall be performed b Licensed installers in a workmanlike manner. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained and qualified. 2. Wring a. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local electrical codes. b. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted. C. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as'Fire Alarm System'with decal or approved markings d. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled'FIRE ALARM'. 3. Final Tests/Warranty a. The system shall be fully tested by the contractor and NICET certified technicians in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested. b. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper .� functioning of the system and conformance to the specifications.The test shall be performed by factory-trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified. Final testing shall be performed by the same company that will hold and execute the Test and Inspection contract. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of one (1)year from the date of final acceptance. d. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one(1)year from the date of final acceptance of the system. 4. Training a. The contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the owner's designated personnel and fire department response teams on the operation of the system. 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required ELECTRICAL 16100-14 '"" t Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75%and 100%of the allowable environmental compensation value. C. Heat Detectors—Fixed Temperature—ROR Heat Detector Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of- rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C)and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. d. Detector Base—Standard Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1-gang, 3 V2 or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European BESA or 1-gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types. e. Manual Station—Double Action Single Stage Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 '/2 (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 '/2 (38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. Manual station shall be keyed alike with Control Panel. f. Notification Appliances Provide low profile wall mount horn/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile horn/strobe shall produce a high level db output an offer a full line of A.D.A. compliant strobes. The horn/strobe shall mount to a standard one-gang electrical box and with an optional trim plate accommodate two-gang, octagonal or four inch square electrical boxes. g. Initiation&Control Modules 1. Relay Module Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps(pilot duty)to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. ELECTRICAL 16100-13 No Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 ., Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .� operate all devices shown plus 25% spare capacity, and be wired in a Class B, Style Y fashion. .A e. Audible and visual signals shall be circuited separately to allow continued operation of the visual signal in the event of a silencing of the audible signal. D. Field Mounted System Components 1. Power Supply System power supply(s)shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power,the effected portion(s)of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble '• signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum. All AC power connections shall be to the buildings designated emergency electrical .. power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 —The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. 2. Fire Initiating Devices Intelligent System Devices: Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms. All analog devices shall provide dual LED indicators, a green LED shall flash to denote active communication, and a red LED shall flash to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which will provide a supervised remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, or an auxiliary relay contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure, devices shall remain capable of initiating an alarm sequence. a. SmokeDetector—Photoelectric Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm ELECTRICAL 16100-12 �* Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 15. Signage and labels shall comply with MEC, NFPA 72, and the NFD checklist. B. Sequence of Operation 1. The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device(system smoke, heat detector)shall automatically: a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to Smith College Public Safety via data transmission to Campus monitoring system. b. Sound a voice evacuation signal over all audio circuits. C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a synchronized manner. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence. e. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD display located at the FACP and at remote annunciator. f. Activate the exterior weatherproof beacon. C. General Requirements 10 1. The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The system operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory involvement. 2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and microprocessor-based detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms. Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response W characteristics, history logging, and support electronic addressing. A system-wide response(alarm sequence)to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds. 3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enable the user to set sensitivity parameters. All inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification. The system shall be capable of reporting the status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer. The system shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty (maintenance alert), prior to false alarming. 4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary power, batteries shall support 60 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. !" 5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs. 6. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. 7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable.All wiring shall be as follows: a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor status conditions from any related systems or conventional devices. b. Addressable control modules or relays shall provide auxiliary control functions. C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a IM minimum of 25%spare capacity and be wired in a Class B, Style 4 fashion. d. As a minimum, power supplies and notification appliance circuits shall ELECTRICAL 16100-11 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 .�. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts �*► for proper operation and interconnect to Campus monitoring system. 8. Provide equipment manufactured by Simplex. This constitutes the quality and we performance standard of the equipment to be installed. Systems considered equal in quality standards may be considered. 9. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: go a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101. .. C. Current State Building Code. d. The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. f. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 10. Submit 12 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare capacity allowances. C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of LCD message text assignments. d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification .. circuits and power supplies submitted. Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity allowances. f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier, Simplex(or approved equal), will +.• provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction as well as interface to existing Campus system. g. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 11. Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed installation. Provide the services of a factory trained technician for proper testing and operation of the inter-connect for Campus monitoring. 12. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to delivery to the installing 4W contractor. 13. Provide copies of Operating & Maintenance manuals with the request for final inspection. O&M Manuals shall include the following: a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to the system, whether made as a field change or by a change order. ., C. Include a copy of the final test report, UL certificate and test contract. 14. Three 100% test are to preformed (Vendor, Vendor and Engineer, and Vendor/Engineer and Fire Department). Test areas will be coordinated with the Fire Department to determine initial layout will perform. ELECTRICAL 16100- 10 "" on Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 "* Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12242, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light-20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221 PLR, or equal. 9. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12222, or equal. 10. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle switches. 11. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type"50"-50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type"30"-30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. 12. Drop Cord Receptacles (Quad Outlet) - Two duplex receptacles as specified above mounted in a pendant outlet box, Ericson Cat. No. 6030 with 26031 cover plates. 13. Occupancy sensors to be Watt Stopper passive infrared/ultrasonic DT 200 or equal. 14. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws. 15. Time Clocks shall be 120V-40A three pole Astronomic style with skip a day features by Tork; Model 730OZ or approved equivalent. 16. Timer switches shall be 120V 20A featuring 60 minute time cycle by Tork; Model C560M or approved equivalent. 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Scope 1. Install new analog/addressable fire detection, alarm and control system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The system shall interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein. 2. The fire alarm control panel is a microprocessor based fire alarm system. New peripheral devices shall be integrated onto the existing system digital data communications. Add addressable loop cards as required. 3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; will maintain operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM memory, identify its' exact !I' location, and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications. 4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. � 5. All exceptions, variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer at the time of bid. 6. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm PIP communications according to the contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. 7. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on Simplex systems ELECTRICAL 16100-9 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES .. A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1. Structural conditions. ■„ 2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. Device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. .. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1. Duplex Receptacles-20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 53521, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898HG1, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20350, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 53621G, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12212, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12232, or equal. ELECTRICAL 16100-8 *� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. PART 2—MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise tw specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of steel construction, set screw type. C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3"and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. •* 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the"lay-in"type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. ELECTRICAL 16100-7 40 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 .. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ~" large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. * 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the General Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls ° are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. E. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. ELECTRICAL 16100-6 "* Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. !*R B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle,single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing,etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with ELECTRICAL 16100-5 M Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 •■ Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts OR qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. OR 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six(6)sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions,capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and ,. all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. •� 1.8 PERMITS, FEES,AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required.to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in •• Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS No A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, ELECTRICAL 16100-4 "" go Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 'W Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials ps as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves,frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal"appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. w. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a ELECTRICAL 16100-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts • SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1,as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. •• Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: , 1. Installation of new Fire Alarm system 2. Branch Circuit Wring and Conduit. 3. Wiring devices and plates. 4. Power wiring to motors and equipment fumished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 5. Interface system with Campus fire alarm system. 6. Lighting fixtures. 7. Telecommunications system. 8. Feeders 9. New Distribution and Panelboards 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions �*+ at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his .o work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or ELECTRICAL 16100-2 �* Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College �■, Northampton, Massachusetts INDEX SECTION 266100-ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3. 1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING 1. 3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. 5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 TESTING 1. 7 SUBMITTALS 3. 7 FIRE SAFING 1. 8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1. 9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2-MATERIALS 2. 1 RACEWAYS 2.2 WIREWAYS !" 2. 3 CONDUCTORS 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2. 5 NAMEPLATES 2.6 WIRING DEVICES 2. 7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2. 8 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2. 9 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM �r 2.10 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 2.11 PANEL BOARDS 2.12 TELECOMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ELECTRICAL 16100-1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one(1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one(1)spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative,who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.12 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation w 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION HVAC 15600-61 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .. A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly X111 cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. .. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. *" 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and, additionally, so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except run out valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass"S"hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on"Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic,which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of .. these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each air handling unit and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after .0 substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. HVAC 15600-60 Pill Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 PIP Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side(ph =7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time"stop-leak" compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP HVAC 15600-59 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is .� installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the"SE"value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other .. temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in *■ operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating &Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water .�. in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning HVAC 15600-58 A Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 • Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College PIN Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. All cutting, patching and drilling shall be by the General Contractor. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms,vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. !!" F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping Y systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. HVAC 15600-57 .w Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected. 6. Walls, including gypsum board non-bearing partitions, which have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame. P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. �. Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1. Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1/2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 in. I.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure �• to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. 2. Ductwork: a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in cross sectional area. b. Round duct less than 28 in. in diameter. C. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the duct work. R. Suspended Equipment: 1. VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and rigidly connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a minimum of ■* 4 hanger rods. S. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and/or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Air Handling Units 1, 4, 19 Internal Isolation Pumps—In-Line 23 HVAC 15600-56 FM Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40 ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacings of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork: 1. All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Specification 10 hangers or Specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in. 2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the building structure by Specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork: 1. Seismically restrain all duct work with Specification 12 or 13 restraints as listed below: a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq. ft. or larger. b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or larger. C. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than the specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. 4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze. HVAC 15600-55 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room as Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts no, 1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. ' Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three(3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1-1/2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1/2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical equipment(fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1-1/4" I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1/2"diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, �+ except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a HVAC 15600-54 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement which results from high air throughst in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: HVAC 15600-53 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer , neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used .. in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 27. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for throughst at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one(1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal throughst restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution-General: 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in .. strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall ,■, be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. +* 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to HVAC 15600-52 OR Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1- 1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up .- to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the throughst at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints P• shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples go 3x14 10x26 1/2x9 1-1/2x13 4x15 12x283/4x102x14 5x19 14x301 x11 2-1/2x18 6x20 16x321/4x12 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. HVAC 15600-51 so Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable .�. loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors ■. shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation *" Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer ■* 1-1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All "* spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall ■• be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar HVAC 15600-50 on Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College ,,,,, Northampton, Massachusetts 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to pre-vent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel !* members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z- 1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre-approval"R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud +! anchor shall also have a safety shoulder which fully supports the wedge -49 HVAC 15600 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room am Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts to pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring as described .� in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4 in. •• thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall .. have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre-compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. .. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. .k 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two(2) .. clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. HVAC 1560048 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 ow Presentation Room Smith College Admissions . Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable without any housing, and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and r_ between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst HVAC 15600-47 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Minimum"G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. ., Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety ,. Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibilitv Mounted Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. UBC BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. w Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super"Was manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static "* deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. HVAC 15600-46 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. w* F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un- isolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1. Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and tw embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1. The following force levels will be used on this project. HVAC 15600-45 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition +�* is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size, and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all .. connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. " (2) All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals based on independent testing are preferred to approvals based on calculations. Where pre- approved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at ** 45°to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards-most recent or enforced code: .M HVAC 15600-44 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 + " Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps,jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers, and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double-sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. r D. Manufacturer's Data: 1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: 43 HVAC 15600 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. " 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, "* component manufacturer's, and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements(i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as +�+ detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). AC Units Condensing Units Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork Air Handling Units Unit Heaters Air Separators Fans (all types) Boilers Heat Exchangers Cabinet Heaters Piping Chillers Pumps (all types) Compressors Rooftop Units Comp. Room Units Tanks (all types) Condensers C. Definitions: 1. Life Safety Systems HVAC 15600-42 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 !*+ Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts minimum) all-welded perforated top grille (for curved radiators the grille is omitted). RF models to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear side of the water tubes to increase the convective output of the unit. There shall be no less than 32 fins per foot. Fins shall start within 1"of the headers, and shall be spot-welded three times per tube. B. The headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections as required. Standard connection sizes are '/2" NPT tapered thread for supply and return piping, and 1/8" for the vent connection. Internal baffling is provided where required for proper water flow. C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2'-0" to 29'-6" in two inch even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation shall be capable of ' being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or strapping. Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional pedestals shall be provided with the radiation as required. D. Pressure ratings for the radiation, as indicated in the HVAC schedules, shall be as follows: 1. STANDARD: Working pressure-56 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-74 PSI maximum. Standard pressure radiators shall be provided except where noted otherwise. 2. MEDIUM: Working pressure-85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-110 PSI maximum 3. HIGH: Working pressure-128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184 PSI maximum E. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1/64" per foot of radiation at 215°F. The installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator. F. The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat finish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002" -0.003"). The color shall be selected from Runtal's standard color table. G. The radiator manufacturer shall provide a sample of the radiator with grille for evaluation by the Architect/Engineer. H. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators shall be provided with the radiation as required to suit construction. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flat tube panel radiation as manufactured by Runtal North America, Inc. Radson shall be considered an approved equal. 2.28 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with -41 HVAC 15600 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts •� I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. .� The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full A operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owners operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. ., 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: .A 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. 2.27 PANEL RADIATORS A. General: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths, locations, capacities and style as indicated in the drawings and schedules. The wall hung heating panel radiation shall be of one-piece all-welded steel construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded to headers at each end. The radiator shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09" HVAC 1560040 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. EXHAUST FAN EF-3 CONTROL a. Mechanical Room exhaust fan EF-3 shall be controlled by a space temperature sensor. When the respective space temperature rises above setpoint (80 degrees F, adjustable) the exhaust fan shall be commanded to start. Once commanded to start the exhaust damper and intake damper shall be energized open. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amp switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BAS. Provide a manual override push button switch located on or near the thermostat, for timed override operation of the fan to provide ventilation during occupied periods(1 hour, adjustable). b. Typical Points List: 1. EF-3 S/S DO 2. EF-3 Status DI 3. Exhaust Damper Command DO 4. Outdoor Air Intake Damper Command DO 5. Space Temperature Al 6. Manual Ventilation Override DI s 4. TYPICAL PANEL RADIATOR (PR) CONTROL a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2-position hot water control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable). b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back during the unoccupied period. C. Typical Points List: 1. Space Temperature Al 2. Hot Water Valve Command DO 5. STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP CP-1 CONTROL a. Unit pumps shall cycle via factory packaged controls (float actuated) to return condensate from receiver back to the building condensate return system. If the lead pump fails, the lag pump shall immediately start, and alarm to the FMS. The lead/lag control is by factory packaged controls. b. BAS shall monitor pump status via current transformers and alarm for pump failure. C. Sump level will be monitored by DDC system for high level alarm. d. Points list: 1. Lead Pump Status DI 2. Lag Pump Status DI 3. High Condensate Level Alarm DI HVAC 15600-39 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts „■, b. The unit shall operate either in the Occupied Mode or Unoccupied Mode. C. Occupied Mode: 1. During the occupied mode of operation the supply fan, exhaust fan and condensing unit shall run to provide conditioned air to the occupied zone. Unit shall operate to maintain the room temperature setpoint as set at the adjustable thermostat or as overridden by the BAS operator. 2. Provide fan control and outdoor air damper control for either automatic with cooling, manual ON via room thermostat override .. or by BAS operator, or automatically controlled operation based on outdoor air and indoor air temperature. d. Unoccupied Mode: *� 1. The Unoccupied Mode shall commence at the pre-programmed unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the supply fan, and condensing unit shall de-energize and the outdoor air damper shall close. e. Unit operation: 1. The BAS shall index the system between modes of operation (occupied/unoccupied) by a time schedule. 2. Unit start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. f. Filter bank differential pressure: 1. The AHU is equipped with three filter banks: 30% supply pre- filters, 90% supply bag final-filters and 30% exhaust pre-filters. A pressure differential indicating sensor across the filter banks shall indicate an alarm at the BAS for high or low pressure conditions. Provide independent transmitters for each individual filter bank. I. Points List: 1. Supply Fan S/S DO 2. Supply Fan Status DI 5. Outside Air Damper Command DO 6. Outside Air Damper Position DI 7. Condensing Unit Enable DI 8. Discharge Air Temperature Al 9. Outside Air Temperature(common) Al 10. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity(common) Al 11. Room Temperature Al 12. Room Temperature Setpoint Adjust AI 13. Manual Fan ON Override DI 14. Manual Occupied Override DI HVAC 15600-38 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts monitored at the BAS. Upon a failure of the lead pump the BAS shall start the standby pump, stop the lead pump and alarm at the BAS. The standby pump shall come under control of the DDC controller differential pressure sequence. The hot water pumps shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and shall be duty-cycled based on equal run time. C. The DDC controller shall reset the hot water supply temperature inversely proportional to outside air temperature, as follows: 1. Outdoor air temperature OoF (adjustable): hot water supply temperature: 160° F (adjustable). 2. Outdoor air temperature 60°F (adjustable): How water supply temperature 120oF(adjustable). d. The heat exchanger has 1/3-2/3 steam valve control. The steam heat exchanger 1/3 and 2/3 steam control valves shall be modulated as follows to maintain the required hot water supply temperature to the system: 1. The 1/3 control valve shall modulate open as required to maintain hot water supply temperature. When the 1/3 valve reaches full open position, and there is a call for additional heating capacity, the 2/3 valve shall modulate open and the 1/3 valve shall close fully. The 2/3 valve shall modulate as required. If additional heating capacity is *� required, the 1/3 valve shall again modulate open with the 2/3 valve remaining fully open. 2. As the demand for heating capacity decreases, the valves shall modulate and be staged in reverse sequence. e. Points list: 1. Hot Water Pump P-1 S/S DO 2. Hot Water Pump P-1 Status DI 3. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Command AO 4. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Fault DI 5. Hot Water Pump P-2 DO 6. Hot Water Pump P-2 Status DI 7. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Command AO 8. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Fault DI 9. System Differential Pressure Al 10. Hot Water Flow DI 11. Hot Water Pump Selector DO 12. Hot Water Supply Temperature Al 13. Hot Water Return Temperature Al 14. Outside Air Temperature Al 15. HX-1-1/3 Steam Valve AO 16. HX-1-2/3 Steam Valve AO 2. TYPICAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CONTROL(DX COOLING ONLY) a. Air conditioning system is an air handling unit with DX cooling coil and outdoor air-cooled condensing unit. The system is designed as cooling only constant air volume. HVAC 15600-37 �u Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each •® module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points. 1. HEATING HOT WATER HEAT EXCHANGER HX-1 AND HOT WATER PUMPS P-1 AND P-2 CONTROL. a. The heating hot water system shall be enabled whenever the outdoor air temperature falls below 60 degrees F(adjustable). The lead hot water pump shall energize and come under control of its VFD. b. The heating hot water system differential pressure shall be monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC controller shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a differential pressure of 5 psig (adjustable) at the end of .� the longest run. Differential pressure setting and sensor location shall be coordinated in the field with the Balancing Contractor and BAS Contractor. Hot water supply and return water temperature as well as pump status (via differential pressure switches on each pump) shall be HVAC 15600-36 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 u■ Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range of 20%to 95% RH,Visala Mod. HMW40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150%of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140oF. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA- 1 C. k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman With Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network " a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry. b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated. C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables. d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms. e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated. * G. Systems Software HVAC 15600-35 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1%of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type .� and have an accuracy of+1 oF. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52oF to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1 of in this temperature range. ^" Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.25oF in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+ 0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. �. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272-2-XX-B-1- 2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated ... pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap- acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts ,. rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25%for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or +•� chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. HVAC �. 15600-34 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 PIP Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers,or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. -- d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in WIN local override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control HVAC 15600-33 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the"Auto"side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from .. sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor *�+ motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller-LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet)and the Global Network(Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control .. Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. w. HVAC 15600-32 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic " diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of"as-built" Drawings, and one (1)CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. r d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built' graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments(fast motion) or decreased increments(slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: PIN HVAC 15600-31 .o Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room '" Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts „e, 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit,junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000-Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. +* B. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of .� Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals,and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: �* a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specifications shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) b. National Electric Code(NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code HVAC 15600-30 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Condenser fan(s) shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by permanently lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Condenser coil shall have copper tubing with heavy-duty aluminum fins. The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided to sub-cool refrigerant a minimum of 20°F below saturation temperatures. E. Controls shall be factory wired and mounted in a control panel in exterior of the casing. Control panel shall be wired complete with magnetic contactor for both compressor and condenser fan. F. Condensing units shall be Trane Model 2TTA or TTA Series, or equal, with capacities as scheduled. G. Furnish and install refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.25 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, etc. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels shall be Karp type DSC-214M"Universal"(12"x 12"or as noted). 2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Yankee Technology. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All system points will be networked using Lan Gate Routers(LGR)tied into the Camps Ethernet, sharing all new existing points in real time date. It will be the Contactors responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics,and thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS)via the existing software programs 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. HVAC 15600-29 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts . , 1. Double inlet fan wheels with forward curved blades shall be selected to operate at least 25% below the first critical speed and shall be designed for continuous .� operation at maximum rated fan speed. Fan wheels and scrolls shall be constructed of mill galvanized steel. The fan shaft shall be steel, coated with a hydrocarbon rust inhibitor. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory and shall run on permanently lubricated bearings. 2. Blower compartment shall be acoustically insulated to reduce air and motor noise for quiet operation. as D. DX Coil Section: 1. The cooling coil section shall consist of DX coil, condensate pan, metering device, o, and a fully insulated casing. 2. Condensate drain pan shall be fully insulated and shall extend under the entire coil area. 3. Direct expansion coil shall have copper tubes with aluminum plate fins and "® galvanized steel casing. Fins with belled collars shall be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion. Coil shall have supply and discharge connections at the same end. to E. Motor: 1. Fan motor shall be factory supplied and installed of the size and electrical .� characteristics specified on the equipment schedule. F. Special Features: 1. Evaporated Defrost Thermostat — Package containing thermostat with enclosure, wiring and hardware shall be furnished to prevent freeze-up of the cooling coil. Package shall be factory supplied for field installation. 2. Remote Control Transformer Relay Package—Controls shall consist of transformer, relays for the fan and liquid line, and a terminal board all installed within an enclosure. Package shall be factory supplied for field installation. 3. Fan Motor Contactor — A fan motor contactor with a holding coil for the voltage specified or the equipment schedule shall be factory supplied for field installation. G. AHU-2 for this project shall be special purpose air handling unit as manufactured by Unico or approved equal, specifically made for high velocity air distribution applications. Provide accessory duct fittings, outlets and filter inlets,as applicable. 2.24 CONDENSING UNITS A. The air cooled condensing units shall have all operating components assembled on one common base. These shall include: compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor, charging valves, moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, all controls, and refrigerant holding charge. The units shall be designed for outdoor installation. B. Casing shall be of 14 gauge zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components. HVAC 15600-28 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. The installing contractor shall handle the system in accordance with the directions furnished by the manufacturer and as approved by the architect and engineer. The casing shall be air tested at 15 psig and the service piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 psig or 1'/2 times the operating pressure, or as specified in the contract documents. The test pressure shall be held for not less than one hour. I. Backfill ? 1. A 4 inch layer of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench, to provide a uniform bedding for the system. The entire trench shall be evenly backfilled with a similar material as the bedding in 6 inch compacted layers to a minimum height of 6 inches above the top of the insulated piping system. The remaining trench shall be evenly and continuously backfilled in uniform layers with suitable excavated soil. 2. Install piping at uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of flow or as indicated, unless noted otherwise on the drawing. J. Warranty 1. Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor, to repair dry, testable conduit systems and replace components damaged by failure, for the manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than 5 years from date of substantial completion. 2.22 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends;2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones,Armstrong, ± ! or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.23 AIR HANDLING UNITS(AHU) A. Units shall be indoor mounted consisting of an insulated fan section complete with centrifugal fan and motor mounting bracket, a coil section complete with direct expansion cooling coil, drain pan, and filter tracks. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Cabinet shall be constructed on one-piece, seamless galvanized steel painted with a corrosion resistant enamel finish. 2. Cabinet shall be full insulated with a fire retardant material. C. Fan Section: HVAC 15600-27 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. All pipes within the outer casing shall be supported at not more than 10 foot intervals. These supports shall be designed to allow for continuous airflow and drainage of the conduit in place. The straight supports shall be designed to occupy not more than 10% of the annular air space. Supports shall be of the type where insulation thermally isolates the carrier pipe from the outer conduit. The surface of the insulation shall be protected at the support by a sleeve not less than 12 inches long, fitted with traverse and, where required, rotational arresters. G. Outer Conduit Insulation and Jacket 1. Conduit insulation shall be spray applied polyurethane foam, having a nominal 2 Ib/ft3 density for all straight lengths and fittings. The insulation thickness shall be 1 inch maximum. Quality assurance procedures for the insulation shall include a visual check prior to jacketing, to insure there are no insulation voids. The urethane foam shall have the minimum characteristics of 0.16 K-factor, density of 2 Ib/ft3, closed cell content of 90 to 95% and compression strength of 40 psi. 2. The polyurethane foam insulation shall be tested by the manufacturer for mechanical and thermal properties to assure compliance with the above values. All test samples will be taken from production material, identified, tagged and tested in accordance with the table below. Test reports showing results will be furnished to the engineer for approval. Data supplied by the polyurethane foam chemical supplier is not acceptable. Sample Attribute ASTM STD Requirement �* Frequency Insulation Density D 1622 Once per shift >2 Ib/ft3 .. Insulation • D 1621 Once per shift 2:40 psi Compression Strength Insulation Closed D 2856 Once per shift 2190% Cell Content Insulation Thermal C 518 Once per shift <0.16 Btu-in/hr/ftZ/°F Conductivity 3. The outer jacket shall be fiberglass (FRP) and shall be applied directly onto the urethane foam insulation. No PVC or polyethylene jackets shall be allowed. All straights and fittings shall be factory jacketed. H. Installation w HVAC 15600-26 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 � ► Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. General 1. All underground high pressure steam and pumped condensate return distribution lines, as shown on the contract drawings, shall be MULTI-THERM 500, as manufactured by PERMA-PIPE. The system supplier shall have at least five years experience fabricating systems of the composition defined herein. All straight sections, fittings, anchors and other accessories shall be factory prefabricated to job dimensions. Each system layout shall be computer analyzed by the piping system manufacturer, to determine stresses and movement of the service pipe. The system design shall be in strict conformance with ANSI B31.1, latest edition, and stamped by a Massachusetts Registered Professional Engineer. Factory trained field technical assistance shall be provided for the critical periods of the installation; i.e., unloading, field joint instruction and testing. B. Service Pipe 1. Internal piping shall be standard weight carbon steel, except for pumped condensate return piping which shall be Schedule 80. Pipe shall be butt welded for sizes 2.5 inches and larger and socket welded for 2 inches and below. Where possible, straight sections shall be supplied in 40 foot random lengths with 6 inches of piping exposed at each end for field joint fabrication. e C. Subassemblies 1. End seals, gland seals and anchors shall be designed and factory prefabricated to prevent the ingress of moisture into the system. All subassemblies shall be designed to allow for complete draining and drying of the conduit system. D. Service Pipe Insulation 1. Service pipe insulation shall be mineral wool. Split insulation shall be held in place by stainless steel bands installed not more than 18 inches apart. The insulation shall have passed the boiling test requirements specified in the Federal Agency Guidelines.The insulation shall be applied to a thickness of 1-1/2 inches. E. Outer Conduit 1. The steel conduit casing shall be smooth wall, welded steel conduit of the thicknesses specified below: Conduit Size Conduit Thickness 6"—26" 10 Gauge 2. Changes in casing size, as required at oversized casing to allow for carrier pipe expansion, shall be accomplished by eccentric and/or concentric fittings and shall provide for continuous drainage. 3. All casing welds, including elbows, anchors, tees and end seals shall be air tested at 5 psig to assure conduit tightness prior to insulating. Air test records will be verified by the QA Department and submitted to the Engineer for approval. F. Pipe Supports HVAC 15600-25 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts wee 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room .� equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI 816.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI 816.28 for short- radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney"Weldolets" or"Threadolets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1- 1/2"and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88;Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI 816.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. �* 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section ll, Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA- 5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 816.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.21 DIRECT BURIED HIGH PRESSURE STEAM AND PUMPED CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING wo go HVAC 15600-24 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Heating Hot Water Supply and Return: a. Runouts and mains up to 4": 1"thickness 2. Steam and condensate return a. 1 '/2' pipe size and up: 3"thickness b. 1"to 1 '/Z' pipe size:2'W thickness C. Under 1"pipe size: 1 'h"thickness 3. Interior Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping: a. Mains up to 1":'/s"thickness 4. Exterior Refrigerant Suction, Liquid, and Hot Gas Piping: a. Mains up to 1": 'h"thickness Armaflex with corrugated aluminum jacket. r 5. Condensate Drain and Make-Up Water Piping: a. All sizes: '/Z"thickness 6. Equipment: a. Air separators: 1"thickness b. Expansion tanks:3/"thickness C. Heat exchanger: 3"thickness 7. Drains and vents from hot water systems: a. All sizes: %2"thickness 2.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS �w A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturers name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Indoor Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2"and smaller threaded, 2- 1/2" and larger welded, or Type"L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. See separate paragraph for underground piping. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. HVAC 15600-23 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 '/2 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas,all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet +** Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. ., E. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. .. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water, refrigerant piping, condensate drains and makeup water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called to the fact that on all heating hot water, refrigerant, condensate drain piping and make-up water piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. All indoor heating hot water supply and return, steam and condensate return, insulated with Manville FLAMESAFE fiberglass pipe insulation, Owens-Corning fiberglass 25, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean * temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. Jacket shall be FLAMESAFE AP. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. 7. Refrigerant piping and condensate drains shall be insulated with Armaflex Armacell type insulation or equal, vapor sealed to prevent condensation dripping indoors, with UV protective coating where outdoors. 8. Provide equipment insulation similar to piping insulation for expansion tank and air separator. 9. Provide Zeston type fittings or equal for clean finish at elbows and fittings. 10. See pre-manufactured pipe specification for underground steam&condensate return pipe insulation. F. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: HVAC 15600-22 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.17 STEAM TRAPS(FOR HIGH PRESSURE STEAM) A. Steam traps for high pressure steam (upstream of PRV station on this project) shall be as manufactured by Armstrong. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.18 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No.20, at 10'intervals. C. For all other suspended piping -Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12"from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. r F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121 C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.19 INSULATION A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber(flexible)duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c.with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. HVAC 15600-21 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room •* Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and operation instructions. Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell&Gossett or approved equal. .• 2.14 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working .. pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. ^ B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain .. valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature-pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.15 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet,copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. B. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell&Gossett or approved equal. 2.16 STEAM TRAPS(FOR LOW PRESSURE STEAM) A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. HVAC 15600-20 . Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.13 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacturer's instructions a duplex condensate unit as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of (1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps, (2)float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover, and (2)lifting eye bolts. A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning, requiring no additional floor space for servicing. B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250°F for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and RPM, electrical characteristics, and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. (1) Electrical alternator. (2)"Auto-Off Hand"selector switches. (1) Numbered terminal strip. (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. HVAC 15600-19 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to „ Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.9 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. .� Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturers standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water heating system:25-240°F 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft"Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft#11066)and a brass lever handle gauge cock(Ashcroft#1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.11 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems,they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. .� B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES HVAC 15600-18 Pill Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour&Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. *� B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves; manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves-Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: Fm 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - !'�' Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller- Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure G-931. 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used wr as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes Tour&Anderson Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and per bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves,which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. HVAC 15600-17 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts M. manifold location n. fitting assembly instructions o. insulation practices p. installation method by construction type q. control applications r. system start-up procedures 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized. 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. 2.6 EXHAUST FANS A. Sidewall direct drive exhaust fan shall be by Greeheck or Cook, as scheduled on drawings. B. Ceiling exhaust fans and fan lights shall be by Broan or Nutone. Duct connection and noise level shall be as scheduled on drawings. 2.7 CIRCULATING PUMPS " A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5oF to 2500 (A5oC to 121°C)and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, 125-lb.flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be of tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.8 VALVES HVAC 15600-16 .� Fn Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the 11110 same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to P" indicate cooler return water. g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability, except where noticed otherwise. 3. Fittings a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule p• and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. b. Fitting Types:Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8"3/4" Manifold to 1/2"copper tubing Hose Bib Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements 1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be included relating to the following: a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting d. tube bending e. tube repairing f. tube connections g. tube solvent sensitivity h. tube UV light sensitivity " i. tube capacity and pressure drop j. tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures I. manifold assembly instructions HVAC 15600-15 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ** Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3/4" 210 180 j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the .. tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9"(paragraph of ASTM F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65%to 89% inclusive." I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time to failure of boiled *• sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8"tubing 3.0" radius 1/2"tubing 3.75" radius 5/8"tubing 4.5" radius 3/4"tubing 5.75" radius n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five (5)feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: 1. Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. , 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876. 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. Additional Marking 1. Date of manufacturing. 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing�installation shall consist of individual .. loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water ` HVAC 15600-14 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College W Northampton, Massachusetts b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and pressure. C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation"as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. The tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances t" Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness w• 3/8" 0.500" 0.070" 112" 0.625" 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 314" 0.875' 0.097" Tubing shall be 3/" O.D. (5/8" nominal) unless noted otherwise. g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3. h. Sustained Pressure: Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 250 210 1/2" 195 165 5/8" 190 165 No 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 275 235 1/2" 215 185 5/8" 210 180 PIP HVAC 15600-13 monnyw Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A„ B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FUAG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish,with opposed blade damper. C. Top Return Grille(TRG) -Custom stamped architectural grille by Kees or McNichols. Pattern to be Full Cloverleaf, 45% minimum free area,with surface mount frame and wall/duct sleeve, prepped for on site painting, constructed of minimum 16 gauge steel. D. Top Supply Registers (TSR) - Titus Model 271 FUAG-15 aluminum construction, double *� deflection,white finish,with opposed blade damper. E. Ceiling Diffuser(CD) -Titus Model TDV steel construction, adjustable discharge diffuser, with opposed blade damper. F. Unico system (AHU-1) supply and return outlets and filter inlets shall be as furnished by Unico. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1. Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird .. screen,and custom color Kynar 500 finish. 2.5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Scope of Work 1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. B. References 1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". 3. German Standard DIN 4726, 'Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". C. Materials 1. Tube a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. w HVAC 15600-12 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 O Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1; to be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside- bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. T. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing(minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES,AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Price, Titus, or Krueger, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to 0w be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. HVAC 15600-11 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". .w H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12"on centers and not less than two per side of 12"or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection .. attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung •■ with black 1"x 1/16"strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6"centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2"WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1%for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed *` with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the ,.. butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro- Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. wo O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing • inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"x 1/8"returning angles on both sides HVAC 15600-10 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 • Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. Use proprietory products for Unico System as noted and where required by installation instructions. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections T-6"wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60 in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2"x 1/8"angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8"rivets at not more than 4-1/2" HVAC 15600-9 OR Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room *� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder,and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no .. additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. .A D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, .. debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work and *� materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to .■, remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS HVAC 15600-8 �. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval,three(3)copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. RIP 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans,etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. HVAC 15600-7 w. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room �* Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be coordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. No B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure .w above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE ■» A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair *■ or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS r. A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is HVAC 15600-6 uw Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING HVAC 15600-5 an Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room "' Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .o expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. ..� J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ON A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution *� will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units,Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. no 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types ' for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six(6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving .� all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one(1)set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. *• B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and HVAC 15600-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own HVAC 15600-3 w Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room `* Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts No SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING(HVAC) 4W PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS "" A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. w B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. .u. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably .� incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1. Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters and radiators. 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps, heat exchanger,valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for make up air exhaust and air conditioning, including registers, louvers,and dampers. .� 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 8. Air handling units 9. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc. 10. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 11. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be performed by"Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc."and billed directly to the College. 12. Guarantee. 13. Instructions. 14. Record Drawings. 15. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. B. The air conditioning system for the second floor (AHU-2, condensing unit CU-2, and associated ductwork)shall be Bid Alternate#3. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES,AND INSPECTIONS HVAC 15600-2 .� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts INDEX SECTION 235500-HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3. 1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3. 2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING 1. 3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 3 PIPE INSTALLATION 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. 5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 1. 6 PRODUCTS 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS 1. 7 SUBMITTALS 3. 7 INSULATION w' 1. 8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1. 9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3. 9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING 1.13 WORK CONCEALED 1.14 GUARANTEE 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 PROTECTION 1.17 CLEANING 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2-MATERIALS 2. 1 SHEET METALWORK 2.25 ACCESS PANELS 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES,AND REGISTERS 2.27 PANEL RADIATORS 2.4 LOUVERS 2.28 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 2.5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTM 2.6 EXHAUST FANS 2.7 CIRCULATING PUMPS 2. 8 VALVES 2.9 THERMOMETERS 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.11 UNIONS 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES 2.13 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS 2.14 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES 2.15 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 2.16 STEAM TRAPS(FOR LOW PRESSURE STEAM) 2.17 STEAM TRAPS (FOR HIGH PRESSURE STEAM) 2.18 HANGERS 2.19 INSULATION 2.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.21 DIRECT BURIED HIGH PRESSURE STEAM & PUMPED CONDENSTATE RETURN PIPING 2.22 STRAINERS 2.23 AIR HANDLING UNITS(AHU) 2.24 CONDENSING UNITS HVAC 15600-1 ON Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room ■* Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. After twenty-four(24) hours test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required �* full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as .. manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.12 GAS SERVICE A. This contractor shall arrange for the removal of the existing gas service by Bay State Gas Company. All arrangements for this service/removal shall be coordinated by the contractor and billed direct to the college. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 15400-30 *� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College W Northampton, Massachusetts 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS u A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Con- tractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. PLUMBING 15400-29 WX Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ON Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Im will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE + A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6"of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS ON A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2"between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. PLUMBING 15400-28 *� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1. Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1/2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 in. I.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. P. Suspended Equipment: 1. Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. Q. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and/or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Pumps—Base Mounted 1, 4, 18, 23 Pumps—In-Line 23 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 450 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. !!" 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. r� B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees w PLUMBING 15400-27 ww Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room *■ Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must *� include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1-1/4 in. 1.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1/2 in. diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20-ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. PLUMBING 15400-26 �"" s Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 W Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: P 9: 1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1- 1/2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1/2 in. deflection PLUMBING 15400-25 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height ,■ of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around ■" the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor,wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. '"AR 27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so •• it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one(1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the s duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. no K. Execution-General: ow 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be �+ made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building"includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. .� 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. PLUMBING 15400-24 ""' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 • Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. PIP Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x14 10x26 1/2x9 1-1/2x13 4x15 12x28 3/4x10 2x14 5x19 14x30 1x11 2-1/2x18 6x20 16x32 1/4x12 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, on Inc. PLUMBING 15400-23 am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room wr Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts „,o equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is"rolled up"to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The .� base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to �* resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs .a waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof , structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used PLUMBING 15400-22 """' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be " special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in.thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z- 1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be PLUMBING 15400-21 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R° Number from OSHPD in the State of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. •�• 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum of 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting .� the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. �. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. .w 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR- MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30°arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is PLUMBING 15400-20 """ Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance _ with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super"Was manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron ' casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking PLUMBING 15400-19 so Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Im Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .. G. Related Work: .. 1. Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the .w structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around o"' the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage ,w and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: no a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. �* 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1. The following force levels will be used on this project. ,. Minimum"G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. UBC * BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 SBCCI I. Product Intent: PLUMBING 15400-18 ""' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. (2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. + � Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 450 to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring *! methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards- most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated PIP equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. PLUMBING 15400-17 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ON Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts we handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. ., 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge ' anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: .. a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: PLUMBING 15400-16 "'" Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. *" 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). Air Separators Battery Racks Compressors Comp. Room Units Conduit Electrical Panels Piping Pumps (All types) Tanks(All types) C. Definitions: 1. Life Safety Systems w a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air ,,, PLUMBING 15400-15 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. Type"N'-pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves. C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant pressure. 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ** A. Furnish and install the backflow preventers, as scheduled on the Drawings and as manufactured by Watts Regulator: B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or equal. .. E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection,and pay all fees and charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. 2.16 WATER HEATER A. Water heater shall be electric tank type, Model DSE-40-3, as manufactured by A.O. Smith or equal by P.V.I., Rheem, or Ace. Water heater shall be of glass-lined design and include 3 KW electric heating element and safety relief valve, extruded anode rod rigidly supported for cathodic protection. Heater shall be equipped with 3/" NPT water inlet and outlet openings. Heater shall have a minimum working pressure of 160 psi and include a high temperature limit control and dual thermostat for accurate temperature control. Unit shall be wired for 208 volts, three phase,60 Hertz. B. Furnish and install P&T relief valve, vacuum breaker and outer jacket with baked enamel w finish. 2.17 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in ..® accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall �. be certified by the manufacturer. PLUMBING 15400-14 """' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Trim- Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. F. Kitchenette Sink(P-5A) 1. Sink— 17"x 15"x 5 %'deep, self-rimming single bowl, 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening undercoat, punched for four (4) holes on ledge, Elkay Lustertone Model No. LRAD1517-55, or equal. 2. Faucet—Two handle kitchen deck faucet, solid brass fabricated body, 8"centers, 9 %2' long swing spout,with anti-siphon spray attachment, Delta Model No. 2476- LHP with handle option H24 and A22 accent handle. 3. Stainless steel cup strainer, 1 '/z°tailpiece and P-trap with cleanout plug. 4. Provide aquapure water filter Model DWS-1000 under sink with the DWS faucet mounted on sink deck. G. Hose Bibb(P-8) 1. Woodford Model No. 24P,with vacuum breaker and loose key. 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE A. Furnish and install one(1) Powers Model No. 1434-A-D-M-1 without vacuum breaker, single Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, outlet volume/shut-off valve, dial thermometer (range: 0 to 1408, rough bronze finish, complete with unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion resistant thermostat element. B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall be sized for 45 gpm at a 10 lb. pressure drop. C. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.12 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. 2.13 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E.Standard 1018. B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. �, PLUMBING 15400-13 go Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room "" Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts am plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal"(12"x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim ON Access Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD(12"x 12"min.)with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. C. Access panels shall be furnished and installed at all valves, cleanouts, shock absorbers and unions. 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish 40 type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet(P-1) 1. Closet — American Standard "Cadet' Model 2386.010, elongated vitreous china, tank type toilet, 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Seat - Church Mode1295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 3. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. D. Lavatory(P-2) 1. Basin—American Standard "Lucerne" Model 0356.421 wall mounted lavatory set to meet ADA regulation. 2. Supply Fitting — Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. „ 3. Fittings— Provide chrome plated offset"P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav- Guard" molded vinyl insulation. 4. Mounting height shall be no higher than 34" from top of front rim to finished floor with Zurn Model Z1231 Rigid System. E. Mop Receptor(P-3) no 1. Basin -Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24"x 24"x 10"high mop basin. 2. Faucet—T& S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers, with vacuum breaker go spout, pail hook, rough chrome plated, built-in stops, heavy duty assembly with bottom brace. PLUMBING 15400-12 to Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. er• B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor r barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2° F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2"nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water: 30°F-180°F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. 114 s ubstitutions will be allowed. 2.9 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in ,�„ PLUMBING 15400-11 w� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 rr Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson. F. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond 1B-418 or I13-440. 1. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2"diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal B. For cast iron pipe-Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot(12) intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 .. insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insula- tion. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot(8)intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1) of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2"from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ' ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor, Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water P�P� 9 i in shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2"thick for cold water. Insulation shall be PLUMBING 15400-10 '"" Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts D. All hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. All below slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type X'soft rolled with silver solder joints. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code and NFPA 54. All piping 2" and below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1/2" and above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure. 1. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series 86001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions II be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2"or 3/4"solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1"and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4"and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non- ! ? shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1 R1138, Stockman,or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1138,or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 1. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with „ „ PLUMBING 15400-9 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ordination drawings. All co-ordination drawings for the plumbing work shall be prepared by this Subcontractor on backgrounds prepared by the HVAC Contractor. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than %7=1% clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes by the other trades. D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract, Architectural, or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, .� and details. G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substututwonS will No allowed All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3"and smaller shall be Type"L"copper pipe with solder ., fittings. C. All waste lines 2"and smaller shall be Type"L"copper. All vent lines 2"and smaller shall be type"M"copper. PLUMBING 15400-8 "" pa Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 «�* Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owners representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: ,P 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment,care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. e 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair ,* or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be WIN considered as being defective. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. 1.19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co- PLUMBING 15400-7 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. .� 1.13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. .� 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage .. rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to PLUMBING 15400-6 ""' Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to JIM supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. W B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING P' A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the mith College Physir_al Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times,fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. PIP 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. PLUMBING 15400-5 on Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a w. qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. ** made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six(6)sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and .. all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and sub- stitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. PLUMBING 15400-4 ""` eat Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 FIN Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage PR shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, W etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. PLUMBING 15400-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ., SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1,as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. .� Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK •■+ A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts,fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 2. New water heating system complete with new electric tank type heater and mixing valve. 3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 4. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 6. Removal of existing gas piping system. 7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat exchangers, and controls)to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. �►+ 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract PLUMBING 15400-2 '" Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts INDEX SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION . 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3. 1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 1. 2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1. 3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. 5 INSULATION 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1. 7 SUBMITTALS 3. 7 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1. 8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 8 CLEANING UP 1. 9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3. 9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 DISINFECTION 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 3.11 FIRE SAFING 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 GAS SERVICE 1.13 PROTECTION 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.15 WORK CONCEALED 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.17 GUARANTEE 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES PART 2-MATFR_ IALS. vp 2. 1 PIPING MATERIALS 2. 2 BALL VALVES 2. 3 HANGERS 2.4 CLEANOUTS 2. 5 INSULATION 2.6 THERMOMETERS 2. 7 PRESSURE GAUGES 2. 8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 2. 9 ACCESS PANELS 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE 2.12 DEMOLITION 2.13 TRAP PRIMER 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 2.16 WATER HEATER 2.17 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL „1„ PLUMBING 15400-1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room �• Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located not closer than 1 inch (25 mm)to interior face of glass. w 1. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening if slats are tilted open. 2. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. 3. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. 4. Recessed: Install headrail concealed within blind pocket. B. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly and easily throughout entire operational range. END OF SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 12491 -HORIZONTAL BLINDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS " A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. B. Provide blinds passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701. C. Product Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WCMA A 100.1. PART 2-PRODUCTS P4 2.1 HORIZONTAL BLINDS A. Acceptable products: 1. Levelor 2" Premium Wood Blinds by Blinds.com (http://www.blinds.com) 2. Hunter Douglas Chalet 2"Wood by Blinds.com (http://www.blinds.com) 3. Blinds.com 2" Deluxe Woods by Blinds.com(http://www.blinds.com) B. Color: to be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer's standard colors and woods. C. Louver Slats: Wood. D. Slat Width: 2 inches (50 mm). E. Tilt Operation: Manual with cord. F. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. G. Mounting: Wall H. Size: blinds to be sized min. 6" wider (3" each side) and 3" taller than window or window grouping they are to be installed. I. Fabrication: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabricate concealed components from noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 2. Provide lifting and tilting mechanisms with permanently lubricated moving parts. PART 3-EXECUTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested w according to method in ASTM F 446. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10801 OR TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3 no Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room No Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts o 4. Material: Stainless steel. 5. Operation: dispensing system, inner housing and cam - 18-8 S, type 304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel. *� 6. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch-(127-mm-)diameter-core tissue rolls. D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Contura Series surface-mounted soap dispenser, B- 4112 2. Mounting: Surface. *■ 3. Capacity: 40 fluid ounces. 4. Materials: type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, black molded plastic push button 5. Stainless-Steel Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. ., 6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type. E. Grab Bar: •�++ 1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm)thick. 2. Mounting: Concealed. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)for heavy-duty applications. 5. Length: 42" F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Contura Series recessed napkin/tampon dispenser, B- + 43500 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Door or Cover: Self-closing. 5. Receptacle: Removable. G. Mirror Unit: 1. Size: 24"x 36" 2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). H. Robe Hook: 1. Mounting: back of door, 48"above finished floor. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES .. 10801 -2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS ! A. Submittals: Product Data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 2.2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick B. Paper Towel Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Contura Series recessed paper towel dispenser, B- 43944 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Minimum Capacity: 600 C-fold. 4. Material: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Contura Series surface mounted multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser, B-4288. 2. Type: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 10520-FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS *+ A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10, listed and labeled for the type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. C. Installation as required per City of Northampton Fire Department Fire Prevention Checklist and Installation Guide. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Portable Fire Extinguishers: 5 lb. ABC extinguisher under each double action pull station. w PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install brackets at heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION O 10520- 1 FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 6. Finish with two coats oil-base satin polyurethane or Sutherland Welles tung oil, sanding between coats. I. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried. J. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended for the material and texture required. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. K. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat to material to be painted or finished that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. M. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. N. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. O. Provide "Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a) Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. b) Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c) Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish op or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop- coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. w. a) Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's " directions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required • during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed .. surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. .m H. Wood stain to match existing woodwork: 1. Finish sand all woodwork OR 2. Stain with Sutherland Welles oil-based wood stain to warm yellow-brown. Allow to dry. 3. Seal with one coat Sutherland Welles tung oil sealer. Let dry. Sand lightly. 4. Glaze with grey-white liming stain. Wipe off to match existing. 5. Fill nail holes to match final color. PAINTING OR 09900-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 1. As scheduled by Architect from manufacturer's standard range E. Wood staining: 1. As scheduled by Architect. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordination: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. C. Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Cleaning: Clean substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen to remove 40 glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a) Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b) Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. IMP 09900-3 PAINTING Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .A Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts b) Ferrous Metal: Two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. G. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. H. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. I. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 2. The Architect will select areas or surfaces within rooms for sample panels. Apply coatings in this room or surface according to the schedule or as specified. J. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the product trade name manufacturer's instructions. K. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. L. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. M. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F(10 deg C)and 90 deg F(32 deg C). N. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F(7 deg C)and 95 deg F (35 deg C). PART II -PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as scheduled from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore 2. Pratt& Lambert 3. Sherwin Williams B. Paint Materials, General: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. PAINTING OR 09900-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 w► Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College W Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 09900 -PAINTING 4 PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatments. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the schedules, except where MR a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. a) Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. b) List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. c) Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOCs). d) Substitutions for materials schedule to be approved by Architect. Color matching not approved substitution. If acceptable color can not be found in proposed palette, provide paint color and manufacturer as scheduled. E. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. F. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a) Painted Wood: Two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on hardboard. !" 09900-1 PAINTING Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room we Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts g. E. Width: 12'0" F. Color: as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard range of colors. 2.3 CARPET, F4 (Stair#1 runner, Stair Hall 200SH) A. Products: 1. Bentley Prince Street, "Urban Scene" Broadloom Collection " B. Fiber Content: Antron Legacy cf nylon C. Tufted Yarn Weight: 34 oz./sq. yd D. Construction: tufted tip-sheared. E. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard. F. Width: 12'6" G. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. H. Color: as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard range of colors. .. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip." B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. +� C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION CARPET .. 09680-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 go Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 09680 -CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. B. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." C. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner full-width carpet equal to 5 percent of each type and color carpet installed, packaged with protective covering for storage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET, F1 (Presentation Room 101) A. Products: 1. Bentley Prince Street, "Mystic Journey"Collection, style: "Falling Rain" B. Fiber Content: Antron Legacy HRC cf nylon and Antron Brilliance cf nylon C. Tufted Yarn Weight: 34 oz./sq. yd. D. Construction: tufted tip-sheared. E. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard. F. Width: 12'6" G. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. H. Color: as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard range of colors. 2.2 CARPET, F3(Stair HallNestibule 100V) A. Products: 1. Shaw Inside/Out collection, "Succession", #54184 B. Fiber Content: 100%Olefin C. Tufted Yarn Weight: 43 oz./sq. yd. D. Primary Backing: Rubber. CARPET 09680-1 r Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 3.08 INITIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. General: Include in Contract Sum Amount cost for initial maintenance procedures, and execute procedures after flooring installation as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Initial maintenance "Starter Kit" supplied by manufacturer. Initial maintenance to be conducted by flooring contractor. C. Drying Room Yellowing: Expose installed linoleum to either natural or artificial light to allow "drying room yellowing" (the film is a natural occurrence of the oxidation of the linseed oil in linoleum products) on installed linoleum flooring to disappear prior to initiating temporary protection procedures. END OF SECTION 4 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-7 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts complementary colored heat welding rod of complimentary composition in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Adhesive Flooring and Flash Coved Base Installation: Extend flooring up the wall in a flash-coved method to a height of 4 inches or 6 inches(102 or 152 mm), as indicated. 3. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 150 sq. ft./gal. (3.7 mZ) as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Installation Techniques: 1. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of finished flooring, install flooring before these items are installed. 2. Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and built-in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and cabinets. 3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 4. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finish floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. 5. Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use expansion joint covers manufactured for use with resilient flooring. Refer to other specification sections for expansion joint covers. 6. Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed installation. •. a. Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. .w 7. Roll resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring manufacturer. C. Finish Flooring Patterns:As selected by Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with at least 72 hours notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended by tile floor manufacturer. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor after installation. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop flooring to remove black marks and soil. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-6 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY A. Source Quality: Obtain flooring product materials from a single manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions(which have been previously installed under other sections)are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. B. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Prepare floor substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Floor Substrate: Prepare floor substrate to be smooth, rigid, flat, level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvent, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue. C. Wood Subfloor Substrate: Prepare wood subfloor substrate to be rigid, double construction with a one inch (25.4 mm) minimum thickness, free from harmful movement and have at least 18 inches of well ventilated air space below. Do not install flooring over wooden subfloors built on sleepers over, on or below grade concrete floors. Fill a. Refer to Division 6 Carpentry sections for wood subfloor construction. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Adhesive Flooring Installation: Cut required length of linoleum flooring from roll, allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and position sheet flooring so that !' any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. Install sheet flooring square with room axis. 1. Adhesive, Seamless Flooring Installation: Rout out seams and heat weld together with RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College .. Northampton, Massachusetts 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals(Maintenance Materials)Section. 1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to 5%of amount installed. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials. 40 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING ■p A. Manufacturer: Forbo Linoleum, Inc. 1. Contact: Humboldt Industrial Park, P.O. Box 667, Hazleton, PA 18201;Telephone: 800 842 7839, 570 459 0771; Fax: 570 450 0258. B. Proprietary Product(s): Marmoleum Dual Linoleum Sheet and Linoleum Adhesive. 1. Description: Homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto natural jute backing. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of material. 2. Width: 79"(2 Meters). 3. Length: 89 Linear Feet(27 Meters). 4. Gauge: 1/10"(2.5 MM). 5. Backing: Jute. 6. Pattern and Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns and colors. 7. Adhesive: Forbo Linoleum, Inc., L910 Adhesive(US)or Forbo Linotack 414(Canada). 8. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Linoleum, Inc., Marmoweld color-matched welding rod. 9. TopshieldTM finish C. Proprietary Product(s): Marmoleum Real, Marmoleum Fresco, Marmoleum Vivace Linoleum Sheet ..� and Linoleum Adhesive. 1. Description: Homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto natural jute backing. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of material. 2. Width: 79"(2 Meters). 3. Length: 105 Linear Feet(32 Meters). 4. Gauge: .080"(2.0 MM), or 1/10"(2.5 MM), or 1/8"(3.2 MM). + 5. Backing: Jute. 6. Pattern and Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns and colors. 7. Adhesive: Forbo Linoleum, Inc., L910 Adhesive(US)or Forbo Linotack 414(Canada). 8. Heat Welding Rod: Marmoweld color-matched or multi-color welding rod. .. 9. TopshieldTM finish 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Material should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed,weather tight with the permanent HVAC system set at a uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F (20 degrees C)for 72 hrs. prior to, during and after installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, Areas to receive flooring shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F (20 degrees C). The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner. Maximum temperature should not exceed 100 degrees F after installation. B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Temperature Conditions: 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) for 72 hours prior to, during and after installation. C. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Finishing Operations: Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations, have been completed. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to"Conditions of the Contract'for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: Five(5)year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 e� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Im Northampton, Massachusetts 1.04 SUBMITTALS No A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. ON B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA and MSDS product sheets, for specified products. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including 4M anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures. oft E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals(Maintenance Data and Operation Data)Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. .,. 2. Warranty:Warranty documents specified herein. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 1. Engage installer certified as a Forbo"Master Mechanic." B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient linoleum sheet flooring with the following fire .� performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 Rating per NFPA 253(ASTM 648) (0.45 watts/cm2 or greater). �. b. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per NFPA 258 (ASTM E 662). C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings)Section. E. Pre-Installation Inspection: Conduct pre-installation inspection of onsite conditions as pertains to the installation of flooring materials. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 4. w Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 09650-RESILIENT FLOORING(Resilient Linoleum Sheet Flooring) PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Resilient linoleum sheet flooring. 1. Homogeneous linoleum sheet flooring, adhesive installation,TopshieldTM finish. 2. Homogeneous linoleum sheet flooring, adhesive and heat welded seams installation. (For Artoleum, Marmoleum Real, Dual, Fresco, Vivace, Piano, Walton and Cork Carpet), TopshieldTm finish. 3. Homogeneous sheet linoleum flooring, adhesive and flash coved base installation. (For Artoleum, Marmoleum Real, Dual, Fresco,Vivace, Piano and Walton),TopshieldTM finish. B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include: 1. Wood Subflooring: Refer to Division 6 Carpentry Section for wood subflooring and wood undedayment. 2. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Refer to Division 9 Finishes Sections and drawings for resilient wall bases, reducer strips, metal edge strips and other resilient flooring accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM F 2034 for Linoleum Sheet Flooring 2. ASTM E 648-88 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. 3. ASTM E 662-83 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 4. ASTM F 710-86 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 5. ASTM F 970-87 Test Method for Static Load Limit. 6. ASTM 492 for Impact Insulation B. Federal Specification(Fed Spec): 1. Fed Spec L-F-475A Floor Covering,Vinyl, Surface(Tile and Roll),with Backing, February 1971. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 253-1984 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. 2. NFPA 258-1989 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide flooring which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts END OF SECTION op GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-7 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. b. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. c. Install U-bead where indicated. d. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated. e. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. G. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. 3. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214. a. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. ..� b. Level 2 where panels form substrates for tile and where indicated. c. Level 3 for gypsum board where indicated. d. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. e. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces where indicated. 4. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration. 5. For Level gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. 6. Where Level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first and fill (second) coats of joint compound. 7. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. 8. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound. 9. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting-type joint compounds to prefill joints and embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats, with the last coat being a sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat. a. Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in another Division 9 Section. 10. Finish moisture-resistant gypsum backing board to comply with ASTM C 840 and .� gypsum board manufacturer's directions. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-6 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 r Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 2. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 3. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches (813 mm) wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. 4. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. ` 5. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 6. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. 7. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies. 8. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. a. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. b. Space screws a maximum of 8 inches o.c. at edges. 9. Install glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backing board panels to comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 10. Install moisture-resistant gypsum backing board panels at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. '?! 11. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: a. Fasten with screws. 12. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base layers as follows: a. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. b. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. c. Fasten base layers to wood supports with nails and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. E. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. 1. Install cornerbead at external corners. 2. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 09255-5 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room no Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .o A. Install framing to comply with requirements that apply to framing installation. 1. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 2. Isolate framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. a. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. b. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. 3. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. B. Installing Framing for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: As follows: 1. Sway-brace suspended framing with hangers used for support. 2. Install suspended framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by installation standards. C. Installing Framing for Walls and Partitions: Install studs and furring at spacings indicated. 1. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. "" 3. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and men decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. Frame door openings to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 7. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements: a. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose mineral-fiber insulation. b. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall .. studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm)o.c. c. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape. d. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the installation of gypsum board or other construction. D. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 .® Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1) Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. 2) Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third)coats. 3) All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. H. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. I. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. 1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. 2. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. 3. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: a. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. b. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. 4. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514. 5. Foam Gaskets: Closed-cell vinyl foam adhesive-backed strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit metal stud size indicated. 6. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I. 7. Thermal Insulation: Material indicated below and as indicated on drawings, of thickness and width to fill voids formed by Z-furring members: a. Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I. b. Extruded-polystyrene board insulation to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type IV, and with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. c. Blow in cellulose. 8. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: a. 6 mils(0.15 mm), 0.13 perms(7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 9. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-3 WM Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room *+ Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts e. Edges: Tapered. 2. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 36, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Foil backed where indicated. c. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. d. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated. D. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047, formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: 1. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip or electrolytic process, or steel sheet coated with aluminum, or rolled zinc. E. Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard extruded- aluminum accessories of profile indicated. "* 1. Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. F. Joint Treatment Materials: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. 1. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. 2. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. 3. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. a. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board w. manufacturer. b. For filling joints and treating fasteners of moisture-resistant gypsum backing board, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. c. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. 4. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. a. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. b. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 n. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 09255-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ,., following: 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products: " a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. c. United States Gypsum Co. !r B. Steel Framing Components for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. ! " 1. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Standard product fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) to form 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-) deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web). b. Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel with 1-1/2-inch- (38.1-mm-) wide face connected to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal legs(webs). " c. Single- or Double-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch- (38.1-mm-) wide face connected to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal legs(webs). C. Gypsum Board Products: Types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, 5/8" unless otherwise noted. a. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Foil backed where indicated. c. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. d. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. ! 09255- 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in"FGMA Glazing Manual." B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. �w C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. D. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Lock Strip Gasket Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. F. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. G. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. H. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLAZING 08800-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room so Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 40 1. All glazing in doors 2. Glazed panels whose nearest vertical edge occurs within 48" of door and whose bottom edge is below level of top of door, except where an interior wall intersects a solid panel between glass and door. 3. Other glazed panels in which lowest edge is less than 18" above floor; glazing area �.. exceeds 9 sq. ft; and walking surfaces occur on both sides within 36 " of panel, with horizontal walking surface planes within 12"of each other. 4. Both leaves of insulating glass covered above shall be safety glazed. 5. Safety glass 9 sq. ft. or less in area shall meet Category I (safe breakage at 150 ft. lb. impact) requirements; larger lights shall meet Category II (safe breakage a 400 ft. lb. impact) requirements. 6. Safety glass shall be either 1/4" heat-tempered glass, or laminated glass with a clear .A plastic interlayer between two 1/8" thick glass lights, minimum 0.015 in. thick interlayer for Category I, minimum 0.030 in. thick interlayer for Category II. Wired glass may not be used as a safety glass except where specifically called for on drawings as part of a fire- rated assembly. *■ E. Insulating glass: 1. Units shall be certified by Insulated Glass certification Council or by an independent .. testing laboratory as complying with ASTM E 774, Class A. Insulated glass fabricator shall be a member of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers'Association (SIGMA). 2. Units shall consist of two glass lights enclosing a hermetically sealed dry air space. Separate lights with a non-ferrous spacer containing a dessicant, with welded or soldered corners. Double-seal joints between spacer and glass with a primary butyl seal and a secondary polysulfide or silicone sealant. 3. If not shown otherwise on drawings, units shall have outer and inner lights 1/4 in. clear, inner light 1/4 in. clear, 1/2 in air space, overall thickness of 1 in. Provide tempered lights where shown on drawings or required by paragraph 1.2 C above. 4. Glass shall have low-E coating. • 5. Air space shall be Argon filled. F. Frosted/obsured glass 1. Frosted glass to be used in locations descibed on drawings. 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS ,. A. Glass setting materials shall be in accordance with recommendations of glass manufacturer and FGMA Glazing and sealant manuals. B. Setting and edge blocks and spacers: neoprene with 80-90 durometer hardness for setting blocks, 60-70 durometer hardness for edge blocks, 40-50 durometer hardness for spacers. C. Tape: pre-shimmed polymerized butyl rubber, Tremco Poly-Shim or Pre-Shimmed 440, or equal. D. Glazing sealants and caulking compounds: as specfied in Division 7 sealant section for exterior and interior use. Sealant used in conjunction with insulating glass must be compatible with insulating glass seal. GLAZING 08800-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. System Performance Requirements: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading, without failure including loss or r glass breakage attributable to: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Submittals: product data. C. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. E. Compatibility test report from insulating glass edge sealant manufacturer indicating glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers, "FGMA Glazing Manual," and publications of AAMA, LSGA, and SIGMA as applicable to products indicated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. H. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories(NCTL). PART II—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Glass shall be free from distortion, chips, crack, waves, scratches, and bubbles; and shall comply with ASTM C 1036 and C 1048. Provide quality label on each light. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Cardinal, Falconer, Ford, Globe/Amerada, Guardian, Hordis, LOF, PPG, Saint-Gobain, Solar-Seal, Spectrum, Viracon. C. Glass not otherwise specified or noted on drawings shall be 1/4" clear annealed float. 3/16" !* thickness may be used at interior openings less than 60 sq. ft. D. Installation shall comply fully with Massachusetts State Building Code and Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201). Whether or not shown on drawings, use safety glass in following: GLAZING 08800- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts • Weather stripping • Aluminum threshold Hardware Set#8: Coat Hooks, Presentation Room#101 • Hafele 845.10.806, aluminum, polished HARDWARE SETS 08710-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 08710-HARDWARE SETS Note: All hardware US26(satin chrome)finish unless otherwise noted. Hardware Set#1: Entry Door#101, Terrace door#104 Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2065 NSM Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH • Hinges: Stanley FBB223, 5x4-1/2 • Door Kick: 8"x34" !* Weather stripping • Aluminum threshold Hardware Set#2: Presentation Room door,#102 • Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2055 NSM Hinges: Stanley FBB223, 5x4-1/2 • Doorstop: Ives 446 • Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH • Door Kick: pair, 8"x34" w. Hardware Set#3: Presentation Room egress door, #105 • Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2072 NSM • Hinges: Stanley FBB223, 5x4-1/2 Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH Door Kick: pair, 8"x34" • Weather stripping • Aluminum threshold Hardware Set#4: Presentation room, Bypass doors#106k • Stanley 405665-2-Panel 60"Complete Packaged Set—150 lb. Panel Pull: recessed mount, flush pull, friction fit. Hardware Set#5: Vestibule door#103 • Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2010 NSM • Hinges: Stanley FBB179, 5x4-1/2, wide-throw(1800 when open) • Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH • Doorstop: Ives 446 • Magnetic hold open Hardware Set#6: Restrooms, doors#109& 110 • Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2020 NSM • Hinges: Stanley F613179, 5x4-1/2 Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH • Doorstop: Ives 446 Hardware Set#7: Basement Access, door#111 • Mortise/Lever: Corbin Russwin ML 2057 NSM . Hinges: Stanley FBB223, 5x4-1/2 • Doorstop: Ives 446 • Closer: LCN 4111 CUSH Door Kick: pair, 8"x34" HARDWARE SETS 08710-1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Solid Neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40. 4. Flexible vinyl hollow bulb or loop insert. 5. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. Q. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum of type, design, and profile indicated, complete with f' replaceable resilient vinyl wiper-type insert and noncorrosive fasteners. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Hardware Mounting Locations: As recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless indicated otherwise. B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ` C. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces. Barrier free where indicated. D. Hardware Adjustment: Return to Project one month after Owner's occupancy, and adjust hardware to proper operation and function. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. E. Hardware Schedule: Provide hardware for each door as in list of hardware sets. F. Alternate Hardware Schedule: As described under Section 01631 Substitutions and listed in "Hardware Set Alternate" END OF SECTION PR 08710-3 3 DOOR HARDWARE am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Plain-Bearing: Swaged, inner leaf beveled, rounded corners; except provide ball-bearing for doors equipped with closers. 4. Provide top mount hinges where indicated. E. Locks, Latches, and Bolts: Lock system to be tied into Smith College masterkey system. 1. Strikes: Wrought box strikes with extended lip for latch bolts, except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts. F. Equip exit devices with dogging devices where door has closer, except when door is fire- rated. G. Locks: Equip locks with 6-pin tumbler cylinders. 1. Bored: Extra heavy duty cylindrical with removable cores. 2. Mortise: Heavy duty locksets with latch bolt, lever handles, and UL listed and labeled. H. Push/Pull Units: Manufacturer's standard type scheduled, through-bolted for matched pairs. I. Overhead Closers: Where parallel-arm closers are indicated, provide units one size larger ..� than recommended for standard-arm units. K. Holders, Stops, and Bumpers: Provide grey rubber exposed resilient parts. 1. Finish exposed as indicated in hardware schedule. 2. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for the exposure condition. Reinforce the substrate as recommended. L. Silencers: Provide silencers in metal door frames, unless not permitted for fire rating, or weatherstripping is provided; 3 per single-door frame, 6 per double-door frame. M. Miscellaneous Door Hardware: Provide plates, trim, letter box, viewers, knockers, bells, and similar units as indicated. N. Edge Trim: Fabricate units 1/16 inch to 1/2 inch smaller than actual door dimension. Install with self-tapping screws. 1. Provide .050-inch-thick (18 gage with beveled edges, US4 finish for kick plates, armor plates, and edge protection stripping. O. Armor, Kick, and Mop Plates: Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on stop side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated. 1. Material: US4, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). �. P. Weatherstripping: Provide type, size, and profile indicated, continuous at head and jamb edges of each exterior door opening. Provide noncorrosive fasteners. 1. Sponge Neoprene conforming to MIL R 6130, Class II (closed cell). 2. Expanded Neoprene: Cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class B (low swell, oil resistant), Grade 2 (compression-deflection of 3 - 9 psi), and self- extinguishing. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Submit samples of hardware items, showing each required finish from each manufacturer(for acceptance of color and texture only). B. Submit final hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets," to indicate specifically the product to be furnished for each item required on each door. ! " 1. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames as required for hardware preparation. C. For fire-rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFPA Standard 80). On panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating"Fire Exit Hardware." PART II—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturers for various products listed below. An asterisk (*) following manufacturer's name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in Hardware Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer's catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design, and function by other listed manufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect. 1. Butts and Hinges: Stanley*. 2. Cylinders and Locks: Corbin & Russwin*. 3. Push/Pull Units: Baldwin, Ives* 4. Overhead Closers: LCN* 5. Door Trim Units: Baldwin, Ives* 6. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: Baldwin, Corbin & Russwin, Ives*. 7. Door Stripping and Seals: Pemko. 8. Thresholds: Pemko. 9. Sound Stripping: Pemko. C. Finish and base material designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI BHMA A156.18 or the nearest traditional U.S. commercial finish. 1. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least the commercially recognized quality specified in ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards applicable to each particular type of hardware. D. Hinges and Pivots: Provide full-mortise butt, size, weight, and quantity in accordance with requirements established for door size, weight, and frequency of use. 1. Pins: Stainless steel, except steel pins with steel hinges; nonremovable for exterior and public interior exposure; nonrising for nonsecurity exposure; flat button with matching plugs. 2. Ball-Bearing: Swaged, inner leaf beveled, square corners. 08710-1 DOOR HARDWARE po Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 w Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College OW Northampton, Massachusetts B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. END OF SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Panel Configuration: as indicated. 4. Design and Layout: Panel design described below under NWWDA design group. a. NWWDA Design Group: 1-3/4 Interior Panel Doors. 1) Panel Design: As indicated. 5. Interior Fire Doors: Fire-rated doors with 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick stiles and rails and 1-3/8-inch- (35-mm-) thick raised panels, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors of NWWDA Design Group 1-3/8 Interior Panel Doors. 6. Exterior doors: exterior doors with glazing shall have W insulated glass panels, low-E, argon filled. C. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors to comply with the following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. 2. Factory fit doors to comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors. 3. Verify size of opening for new doors installed in extisting openings. D. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. E. Glaze doors at factory for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Glazing shall be W insulated, low-E, argon filled. 2. Glazing shall be tempered at doors and associated side lites. .� F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 1. Glazing shall be W insulated, low-E, argon filled. G. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply • with NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. H. Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." I. Shop seal faces and edges of doors for transparent finish with stain (if required) and other ■ required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to requirements of .w NFPA 80. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 ew. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 08212-WOOD DOORS PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in product data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); location and extent of hardware cutouts; fire ratings; requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing; and other pertinent data. 2. Samples of actual materials in small sections for each face material and finish. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," of w the National Wood Window and Door Association. 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials except where those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. PART 11—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors by one of the following: 1. Wood Doors a. Jeld-wen b. Rogue Valley c. Simpson Door Company 2. MDF Doors a. Jeld-wen b. Mohawk c. Trustile d. Supadoor B. Exterior& Interior Stile and Rail Doors of Stock Design and Construction: As follows: 1. Wood Species for Clear or Stained Finish: Cherry. 2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Manufacturer's standard MDF stiles and panels for paint finish. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212- 1 Mimi, 11111 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2.2 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible *" with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. as PART 3-EXECUTION ■. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 1193. MA B. Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 es• Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College W* Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. B. Sealant for General Exterior Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified: 1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O. C. Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; formulated with fungicide. D. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames: 1. Latex sealant, single-component, non-sag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834. t� E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Interior Joints: 1. Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. F. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: ±! 1. Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Classification/listing designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 3. Through-penetration fire stop system manufacturer's name and product name. END OF SECTION THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 07841 -THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. B. Provide fire stopping systems with fire-resistance ratings indicated by reference to UL designations as listed in its "Fire Resistance Directory," or to designations of another testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide through-penetration fire stopping systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined according to ASTM E 814, but not less than fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. D. For exposed fire stopping, provide products with flame-spread indexes of less than 25 and smoke-developed indexes of less than 450, as determined according to ASTM E 84. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Refer to Division 1 B. Section 15 C. Section 16 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Any through-penetration fire stop system that is classified by UL or listed by ITS for the application and with F-rating indicated may be used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fire stopping systems to comply with requirements listed in testing agency's directo rY for indicated fire-resistance rating. B. Identification: Identify through-penetration fire stop systems with permanent labels attached to surfaces adjacent to fire stop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or fire stop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words"Warning -Through-Penetration Fire stop System-Do Not Disturb." THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts F. Separations: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of +_ asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. G. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm)and bed with sealant. Details as per roofing manufacturer's recommendations. H. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drain line. I. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room so Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 40 F. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. 1. Gutters: 20-oz. copper, match existing profile at Chapin House oft 2. Downspouts: 20-oz. copper, corrugated, 4" round. 3. Drip Edges: copper 4. Equipment Support Flashing: 0.0276-inch-(0.7-mm-)thick galvanized steel. am 5. Roof-Penetration Flashing: 0.0276-inch-(0.7-mm-)thick galvanized steel. G. Coil-Coated Aluminum Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500. w# 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. 1. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. B. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum. 2. Pretinning is not required for lead. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metals other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. For aluminum, form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strengh. 1. Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign material. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38mm), unless pre-tinned surface would show in finished work. .. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL ! A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples for each item specified. 1.2 Related Sections A. Submittals Refer to Division 1 B. Membrane Roofing Refer to 07500 PART II—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14, mill finish, minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm), unless otherwise indicated. B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet, minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) except not less than 0.0937 inch (2.4 mm) thick for applications where burning (welding) is involved. C. Copper: not less than 24 oz./sq. ft. D. Fabric Coated Copper Flashing: Flashing will be fabric coated copper consisting of a full sheet of copper weighing not less than 7 oz per sq. ft. bonded to and between two layers of coarsely woven glass fabric with asphalt. E. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: As follows: 1. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50. 2. Fasteners: Noncorrosive metal. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. 3. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type. 4. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 5. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 6. Elastomeric Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." OR 7. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound. 8. Adhesives: Type recommended for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive. 9. Clips, Straps, Anchoring Devices, and Similar Accessories: Compatible with material being installed. 10. Butyl sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release type for expansion joints with limited movement. 11. Slip sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb./100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m.). SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College po Northampton, Massachusetts END OF SECTION 07210-3 BUILDING INSULATION Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts „w, E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm . F. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. G. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. H. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindler Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inches in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. I. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. J. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART III -EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Installation, General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. 1. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. 2. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit wr tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 3. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. B. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors. w C. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. 1. For cellulosic loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's"Special Report--Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." D. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. E. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, ASTM E 119, or ASTM E 136 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency of acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART II—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS t A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 for type indicated below: 1. Type VII, 2.20-lb/cu. ft. minimum density Styrofoam brand High load 60 2" or approved equal 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5 and 165, respectively. C. Insulation, cellulose: 1. Minimum 80 percent recycled wood-based cellulosic fibers. 2. Flame spread: Less than 25 when tested in accord with ASTM-E84. 3. Density: Not less than 1.6 LB/CF in accord with ASTM-C739. 4. Thermal Resistance: R value of 4.5 per IN when tested in accord with ASTM-C739. 5. Thickness as indicated. 6. Minimum 75 percent total recovered material content per EPA/CPG guidelines. D. Insulation, blanket or batt: 1. Inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets or semi-rigid sheets. 2. Thermal resistance: R-value of 3.7 per inch at 75 degF mean temperature. 3. Craft Paper Faced. 4. Minimum Thickness: 3" 5. ASTM-E84 flame spread: Not greater than 25. 6. Formaldehyde-free fiberglass batt 7. Minumum 25%total recovered material content per EPA/CPG guidelines. 07210- 1 BUILDING INSULATION Sh P E C SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 .w Grace Construction Products Will w OR WIN M Will W.R.Grace&Co.Conn.hopes the information here will be helpful.It is based upon data and knowledge considered to be true and accurate and is offered for the users'consideration,investigation and verification,but we do not warrant the results to be obtained. Please read all statements,recommendations or suggestions in con- junction with our conditions of sale,which apply to all goods supplied by us.No statement,recommendation or suggestion is intended for any use which would infringe any patent or copyright.W.R.Grace& Co.-Conn.,62 Whittemore Avenue,Cambridge,MA 02140.In Canada, � W.R.Grace&Co.Canada.Ltd.,294 Clements Road.West,Ajax, Ontario,Canada LIS 3C6- Bituthene and Hydroproduct are registered trademarks of W.R. Grace&Co,-Conn, Dens-Glass GoldO is a registered trademark of the Georgia-Pacific Corporation. This product may be covered by patents or patents pending. Copyright 2005 W.R.Grace&Co.-Conn. BIT-012W Printed in USA. 11/05 AFS/U/6M w SPEC-DATA'and fv1ANU-SPEC7 are registered trademarks of Reed Eisevier Inc.The ten pad SPEC DATA format conforms to the editorial sye Reed P!i<ST of The Construction Specifications Insfifute and is used with their permission.The monufochurer is responsible for techniml=urarry.D7JU7 Reed construction Data.AO Rights fieserded.. 'Construction Reed I F!R,T Data P E C SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 ?*" Grace Construction Products j footing. Otherwise, use appropriate inside membrane, use Hydroduct 660 Drainage Products representative. corner detail where the wall and footing Composite or 1 14"(6 mm)hardboard or 2 lay- meet.Seal all laps within 12" (300 mm) of all ers of 1/8"(3 mm)hardboard. 7.Warranty corners with a troweling of mastic. Apply a On vertical applications,use Hydroduct 220 Five year material warranties covering troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic or Drainage Composite.Adhere Hydroduct 220 to Bituthene and Hydroduct products are avail- Bituthene Liquid Membrane to all vertical and membrane with Hydroduct Tape. Alternative able upon request.Contact the manufactur- horizontal terminations at the end of each protection methods are to use 1" (25 mm) er for further information. workday. expanded polystyrene or 114" (6 mm) Protrusions and Penetrations extruded polystyrene that has a minimum 8. Maintenance Apply membrane to within 1" (25 mm) of the compressive strength of 10 lb/in'(69 kN/m�. None required,if installed in accordance with base of the protrusion.Apply Liquid Membrane If 114"(6 mm)extruded polystyrene protec- manufacturer's recommendations. 0.090" (23 mm) thick around the protrusion. tion board is used,backfill should not contain Extend Bituthene Liquid Membrane over the sharp rock or aggregate over 2" (50 mm) in 9.Technical Services sheet membrane at least 3" (75 mm) and up diameter. Adhere polystyrene protection Support is provided by full-time, technically the protrusion to just below the finished height board with Hydroduct Tape or compatible trained Grace representatives and technical of the wearing course (for horizontal applica- adhesive. service personnel, backed by a central tions)or for a minimum of 6 (150 mm)for ver- Cover any exposed Bituthene membrane research and development staff. tical applications. with weather resistant flashing such as cop- per,aluminum or neoprene,Install Hydroduct 10. Filing Systems FLOOD TESTING 660 Drainage Composite or alternate protec- - Reed First Source Flood test all horizontal applications with a tion the same day the membrane is applied • Additional product information is available minimum 2" (50 mm) head of water for 24 or immediately after a 24 hour flood test.No from the manufacturer. -- hours. Mark any leaks and repair when the waiting before backfill or application of wear- membrane is dry.Before flood testing,be sure ing course is necessary. I the structure will withstand the dead load of placement of Backfill the water.For well-sloped decks,segment the Use care during backfill operation to avoid flood test to avoid deep water near drains. damage to waterproofing and drainage sys- Conduct the flood test 1 day after com- tem. Follow generally accepted practice for pleting the application of Bituthene water- proofing system.Immediately after flood test backfill and compaction. Backfill should be is completed,and all necessary repairs made, added in 6" - 12" (150 - 300 mm) lifts, For bermed areas that cannot be fully com- install Hydroduct 660 Drainage Composite to protect the Bituthene membrane from traffic pacted, a termination bar is recommended and other trades. across the top termination of the membrane, In general, backfill or the final wearing MEMBRANE REPAIR course should be placed as soon as possible Patch tears and inadequately lapped seams after installation of the membrane. with membrane.Slit fishmouths and repair with Placement of Reinforcing Steel a patch extending 6"(150 mm)in all directions When placing reinforcing steel over properly from the slit and seal edges of the patch with protected membrane,use concrete bar sup- Bituthene Mastic.Inspect the membrane thor- ports (dobies) or chairs with plastic tips or oughly before covering and make any repairs. rolled feet to prevent damage from sharp PROTECTION edges. Use special care when using wire IA! Protection of Membrane mesh,especially if the mesh is curled. Protect Bituthene membranes to avoid dam- age from other trades' construction materials 6.Availability&Cost or backfill,Place protection immediately in tem- AVAILABILITY peratures above 77 degrees F(25 degrees C)to A network of distributors carries Bituthene water- reduce potential for blistering. proofing systems and Hydroduct drainage com On horizontal applications, use Hydroduct posite products for delivery to project sites. 660 Drainage Composite for protection. Adhere as necessary to membrane with COST Hydroduct Tape, Bituthene waterproofing systems and Alternate methods are to use 1/8" or 114" Hydroduct drainage composites are compet- (3 or 6 mm)asphaltic hardboard,When rein- itively priced.For specific information,contact forced concrete slabs are placed over the a local distributor or a Grace Construction SPEC-DATA"and MANU-SPECe are registered trademarks of Reed Bsevier Inc.The ten part SPEGDATA format conforms to the editorial style Reed I I`Rs r`t"3ut cE of The Construction Specifications Institute and is used with their permission.The manufacturer is responsible for technical accuracy.02007 Reed Construction Data.All Rights Reserved. 'Construction Data so SPECO SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 up Grace Construction Products top of membrane wall flashing with Press membrane tightly into corner to ensure full seams at least 2 1/2"(64 mm).Stagger all end Bituthene Mastic, Bituthene Liquid contact, Cover the treated corner with a full laps. Membrane or termination bar sheet of membrane to ensure 2-ply coverage. Roll the entire membrane firmly and com- Option 2 - Apply membrane on deck to For outside corners, apply 12" (300 mm) pletely as soon as possible, Use a linoleum within 1"(25 mm)of corner.Treat the inside membrane strip centered on corner, Cover roller or standard water-filled garden roller corner by installing a 3/4" (19 mm) the treated corner with a full sheet of mem- less than 30"(762 mm)wide,weighing a mini- 01' fillet of Bituthene Liquid Membrane.Extend brane to ensure 2-ply coverage. mum of 75 lb (34 kg) when filled. Cover the Bituthene Liquid Membrane at least 3" (75 Joints face of the roller with a resilient material such mm)onto wall and membrane Properly seal all joints with waterstop,joint filler as a 1/2" (13 mm) plastic foam or 2 wraps of No • Option 3 - Apply membrane on deck to and sealant as required. Bituthene mem- indoor/outdoor carpet to allow the mem- within 1"(25 mm)of corner,Treat the inside branes are not intended to function as the brane to fully contact the primed substrate. corner by installing a 3/4" (19 mm) fillet of primary joint seal.Allow sealant to fully cure, Seal all T-joints and membrane terminations Bituthene Liquid Membrane, Apply mem- Prestrip all slabs and wall cracks over 1/16" with Bituthene Mastic or Bituthene Liquid ■o brave flashing sheet on wall,over fillet and (1.6 mm)wide and all construction and control Membrane at the end of the day. 6"(150 mm)onto deck membrane.Apply 1" joints with 9"(225 mm)wide membrane. For required testing of horizontal applica- (25 mm)wide troweling of Bituthene Mastic tions,see Flood Testing, or Bituthene Liquid Membrane over all ter- Drains minations and seams within 12"(300 mm)of At drains,apply a collar of membrane which Application to Vertical Surfaces corner, Terminate top of membrane wall extends 6"(150 mm)beyond the drain open- Apply membrane in lengths up to 8' (2 m), flashing with Bituthene Mastic, Bituthene ing. Apply full coverage of membrane over Overlap all seams 2 1/2" (64 mm) minimum, Liquid Membrane or termination bar the collar. Cut out the drain opening so the On higher walls,apply membrane in 2 or more JIM In planters, reflecting pools and fountains, membrane extends under the clamping ring, sections with the upper overlapping the lower apply membrane on wall and deck to within Place a bead of Bituthene Mastic or Bituthene by at least 21/2"(64 mm).Roll membrane with 1"(25 mm)of corner,Treat the inside corner by Liquid Membrane between the membrane a hand roller. installing a 3/4" (19 mm) fillet of Bituthene and clamping ring.An alternate method is to Terminate the membrane at grade level no Liquid Membrane. Extend Bituthene Liquid apply Bituthene Liquid Membrane 0,090"(2,3 Press the membrane firmly to the wall with the Membrane at least 3" (75 mm) onto deck mm)thick so that it extends under the clamp- butt end of a hardwood tool such as a membrane and 3" (75 mm) onto wall mem- ing ring and overlaps the deck membrane at hammer handle,or secure into a reglet.A ter- brane.Terminate top of wall membrane with least 3" (75 mm), Install clamping ring after mination bar may be used to secure the top Bituthene Liquid Membrane or termination Bituthene Liquid Membrane has cured, termination. Failure to use heavy pressure at bar. terminations can result in a poor seal. Application to Horizontal Surfaces Terminate the membrane at the base of For wall to wall inside corner, apply 12" Apply membrane from the low point to the the wall if the bottom of the interior floor slab w� (300 mm)membrane strip centered on corner. high point so that laps shed water,Overlap all is at least 6" (150 mm) above the TABLE 2 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF HYDRODUCT DRAINAGE COMPOSITES Property&Test Method Hydroduct 220 Hydroduct 660 Hydroduct 200 Hydroduct 225 Drain core Thickness,ASTM 0366-B 0.433"(11 mm) 0.433"(11 mm) 0.433"(11 mm) 0.433"(11 mm) Compressive strength,ASTM D1621(modified) 15,000 psf(732 kN/m) 21,000 psf(1025 kN/m� 15,000 psf(732 kN/mD 21,000 psf(1025 kN/mD Flow,1.0 gradient,37.9 kPo load,ASTM D4716 16 gal/min/ft 16 gal/min/ft 16 gal/min/ft 16 gal/min/ft �c (003 L/min/m) (0.003 L/min/m) (0.003 L/min/m) (OD03 L/min/m) Filter fabric Apparent opening size,ASTM D4751 100 US sieve 100 US sieve 100 US sieve 40 US sieve (150 micron) (150 micron) (150 micron) (380 micron) Permi1fivity,ASTM D4491 150 gal/min/ft' 80 gal/min/ft' 150 gal/min/ft' 100 gal/min/ft' (6110 L/min/m� (3250 L/min/m� (6110 L/min/mD (4074 L/min/mD Tensile strength,ASTM D4632 110 lb(485 N) 230 lb(1020 N) 110 lb(485 N) 290 lb(1291 N) no weight,ASTM D3776 4.0 oz/yd'(136 N/m`7 8.0 oz/yd'(270 g/m� 4.0 oz/yd'(136 g/m� 6.0 oz/yd'(203 g/m) Mullen Burst,ASTM D3786 215 psi(1480 kPa) 690 psi(4753 kPa) 215 psi(1430 kPa) 480 psi(3304 kPo) Puncture,ASTM D4833 65 lb(285 N) 162 lb(720 N) 65 lb(285 N) 105 lb(720 M XV SPEC-DATA'and MANU-SPEC are registered trademorks of Reed Elsevier Inc.The ten part SPEC-DATA format conform,to the editorial style //7�Reed I I'%S`:'SOURCfi of The Construction Specifications Institute and u used with their perrnission.The manufacturer is responsible for technical accuracy,Q2007 Reed Construction Data.All Rights Reserved. 42.1,Construction Data S P E SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 h, Grace Construction Products (-4 degrees C) hand.Wet conditioner will ball up under the fin- (25 mm) of base of wall. Treat the inside • Apply Bituthene 3000 Membrane only in dry gertips, Let dry until conditioner cannot be corner by installing a 3/4" (19 mm)fillet of weather when air and surface temperatures rubbed off. If conditioned areas are not Bituthene Liquid Membrane. Extend liquid are above 40 degrees F(5 degrees C) covered that day,recondition the area if there membrane at least 3" (75 mm) onto wall • Bituthene Low Temperature Membrane is significant dust or dirt contamination. membrane can be used at temperatures above Primer Option 2 - Treat the inside corner by 25 degrees F (4 degrees C) and up to Apply Bituthene Primer WP-3000 by spray or installing a 3/4" (19 mm) fillet of Bituthene 60 degrees F(16 degrees C) roller at a coverage rate of 500-600 ft'/gal Liquid Membrane,Apply 12"(300 mm)wide • Cover the membrane immediately in tem- (12- 15 m'/L).Allow to dry 1 hour or until con- strip of membrane centered over fillet. peratures above 77 degrees F(25 degrees crete returns to original color. Apply wall membrane over inside corner C)to reduce potential for blistering and extend 6"(150 mm)onto footing.Apply • Apply Bituthene System 4000 Surface Apply Bituthene Primer 62 by lamb's wool 1" (25 mm) wide troweling of Bituthene Conditioner and other accessory products roller a coverage rate of 250-3 gal(6 -8 m'//LL).Allow primer to dry 1 hour or r until ntil tack- Mastic or Bituthene Liquid Membrane over not listed below in dry weather above all terminations and seams within 12" free,Dry time may be longer in cold tempera- 25 degrees F(4 degrees C) tures. (300 mm)of corner • Apply Bituthene Primer WP-3000 in dry Reprime areas if contaminated by dust. If At footings where the elevation of the floor weather above 40 degrees F(5 degrees C) the work area is dusty, apply membrane as slab is 6"(150 mm)or more above the footing, • Do not apply products to frozen concrete soon as the primer is dry, treat the inside corner either by one of the APPLICATION Surfaces treated with Deck Prep Surface above methods or terminate the membrane Surface Conditioner Treatment do not require conditioning or prim- at the base of the wall, Seal the termination Bituthene System 4000 Surface Conditioner is ing, Metal does not require priming but must with Bituthene Mastic or Bituthene Liquid supplied ready to use,Do not dilute with water be clean, dry and free of loose paint, rust or Membrane. or solvents.Spray surface conditioner uniformly other contaminants.Use Bituthene Primer B2 for At plaza deck-to-wall inside corners: to substrate at a rate of 300 ft2/gal(7,5 M2/L), damp or green substrates, Do not apply . Option 1 - Apply membrane on wall and Use appropriate sprayer and nozzle. primer or surface conditioner to membrane. deck to within 1" (25 mm) of corner.Treat Allow surface conditioner to dry completely Corners the inside corner by installing a 3/4" and thoroughly prior to membrane application. The treatment of corners varies depending on (19 mm)fillet of Bituthene Liquid Membrane, The surf ace conditioner is considered dry when the location of the corner. Extend Bituthene Liquid Membrane at least the substrate returns to its original color.To test 3" (75 mm) onto deck membrane and 3" • Optioon p footing 1 - Apply membrane to within 1" for dryness, rub small conditioned area by At wall inside corners: (75 mm) onto wall membrane. Terminate TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUTHENE MEMBRANES Property&Test Method Bituthene System 4000 Membrane Bituthene 3000 Membrane Bituthene Low Temperature Membrane Color Gray-black Dark gray-black Gray-black Thickness,ASTM D3767,Method A 0.060"(1.5 mm)nominal 0.060"(1.5 mm)nominal 0.060"(1,5 mm)nominal Low temperature flexibility,ASTM D1970 Unaffected at-45'F(-43'C) Unaffected at-251F(-32'C) Unaffected at-45'F(-43'C) Resistance to hydrostatic head,ASTM D5385 231'(70 m)min 200'(60 m)min 200'(61 m)min Lap adhesion at minimum application temperature, 5.0 lb/in(880 N/m) 4.0 lb/in(700 N/m) 5.0 lb/in(880 N/m) RIM width,ASTM D1876,Modified Tensile strength,membrane,ASTM D412(Die C), 325 psi(2240 kPa)min 325 psi(2240 kPa)min 325 psi(2240 kPa)min Modified Tensile strength,film,ASTM D882,Modified 5000 psi(34.5 MPa)min 5000 psi(34.5 MPa)min 5000 psi(34.5 MPa)min Elongation,ultimate failure of rubberized asphalt, 300%min 3DO%min 300%min ASTM D412,Modified Cracking cycling,100 cycles,ASTM D836 Unaffected at-25'F(-32'C) Unaffected at-251F(-32'C) Unaffected at-25'F(-32'C) Peel strength,width,ASTM D903,Modified 9.0 lb/in(1576 N/m) 9,0 lb/in(1576 N/m) 9.0 lb/in(1576 N/m) Puncture resistance,membrane,ASTM E154 50 lb(222 N)min 50 lb(222 N)min 50 lb(222 N)min Permeance,maximum,ASTM E96 Water Method 0.05 perms(2.9 ng/(Pa x s x m2)) 0.05 perms(2.9 ng/(Pa x s x m")) 0.05 perms(2.9 ng/(Pa x s x m2)) Water absorption,72 hr,ASTM D570 0.1%max 0.1%max 0.11/a max " o Reed I HRS". S 0 R C E �f. SPEGDATA and MANII-SPEC are registered trademarks of Reed Osevier Inc,The ten part SFECrDATA format corfarm:to the editorial style of fie Construction Specifications Institute and is used with their permission.The manufacturer is responsible for iechNeal accuracy.07J07 Reed construction Data.All Rights Reserged, °'Construction Data SPECO SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 .l Grace Construction Products All Hydroduct drainage composites should • ASTM D4751 Standard Test Method for Carefully read detailed precaution statements be promptly covered.Do not leave drainage Determining Apparent Opening Size of a on product labels and MSDS before use, or exposed to sunlight for more than 2 weeks. Geotextile contact Grace Construction Products. Motor vehicles, construction equipment and • ASTM D4833 Standard Test Method for STORAGE&HANDLING other trades should not be allowed directly on Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, protect all materials from rain and physical the drainage composites. Geomembranes,and Related Products damage. Do not double stack pallets of Protect Bituthene membranes from UV or • ASTM D5385 Standard Test Method for membrane on the jobsite. Provide tarpaulin site damage immediately after installation or Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of cover on top and all sides,allowing for ade- 24 hour flood test. Backfilling or installation of Waterproofing Membranes uate ventilation. Store membrane where the wearing course should be completed as • ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water temperatures will not exceed 90 degrees F soon as possible. Vapor Transmission of Materials (32 degrees C) for extended periods. In low • ASTM E154 Standard Test Methods for Water temperature conditions, the membrane 4.Technical Data Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth should be stored above 40 degrees F APPLICABLE STANDARDS Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as (5 degrees C) to promote good adhesion. ASTM International Ground Cover Store all products in a dry area away from • ASTM C366 Standard Test Methods for APPROVALS high heat, flames or sparks. Store only as Measurement of Thickness of Sandwich Cores • City of Los Angeles Research Report RR much material at point-of-use as required for • ASTM C836 Standard Specification for High 24386 each day's work, Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied • US. Department of Housing and Urban PREPARATORY WORK 8astomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Development(HUD)HUD Materials Release Surface Condition Use with Separate Wearing Course 628E Concrete must be smooth, monolithic and • ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for • Miami Dade,NOA 03-0630.04 free of voids, spalled areas, loose substrate Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic SPECIFICATIONS and sharp protrusions, dirt and debris, and Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers- . American Railway Engineering Association must contain no visible coarse aggregate, w Tension Chapter 29-2-4 Repair defects such as spalled or poorly con- • ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water . Federal Construction Guide Specification solidated areas. Use Bituthene Deck Prep Absorption of Plastics FCGS-07111 Surface Treatment to smooth and level rough • ASTM D882 Standard Test Method for Tensile . General Service Administration(GSA) GSA- concrete decks, Remove sharp protrusions Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting PBS 07115 and form match lines. • ASTM D903 Standard Test Method for Peel . National Railroad Passenger Corporation or Stripping of Adhesive Bonds Curing (Amtrak)Section 7.02 �.£ • ASTM D1621 Standard Test Method for Concrete must be cured a minimum of 7 days Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular • AIA MASTS ores o Section rs C for normal structural concrete and 14 days for • U.S.Army Corps of Engineers CEGS-07111 Plastics lightweight structural concrete. If concrete is • ASTM D1876 Standard Test Method for Peel • U.S.Department of the Navy NFGS-07111 placed over a nonvented metal deck, the • U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs Resistance of Adhesives(i-Peel Test) required curing time is doubled. Use form • ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self- H-08-1 Section 07113 release agents that will not transfer to the con- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous PHYSICAL PROPERTIES crete.Remove forms as soon as possible from Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Bituthene waterproofing membranes conform below horizontal slabs to prevent entrapment .. Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection to the physical property and typical values list- of excess moisture.Excess moisture can lead to • ASTM D3767 Method A- Standard Practice ed in Tables 1 and 3.Hydroduct drainage com- blistering of the membrane. Cure concrete for Rubber-Measurement of Dimensions posites conform to the physical property and with clear,resin based curing compounds con- • ASTM D3776 Standard Test Methods for typical values in Table 2. taining no oil,wax or pigment.Allow concrete ** Mass Per Unit Area(Weight)of Fabric to thoroughly dry following rain. • ASTM D4491 Standard Test Methods for 5. Installation On masonry surfaces, apply a parge coat Water Permeability of Geotextiles by SAFETY to rough concrete block and brick walls or Permittivity trowel-cut mortar joints flush to the face of • ASTM D4533 Standard Test Method for Bituthene products must be properly handled, the concrete blocks. Vapors from the solvent based primer and Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles Cure time and drying time for concrete • ASTM D4632 Standard Test Method for mastic are harmful and flammable. For these r and masonry surfaces may be reduced by products, the best available information on Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of using Bituthene Primer B2. Geotextiles safe handling, storage, personal protection, • ASTM D4716 Standard Test Method for health and environmental considerations has TEMPERATURE Constant Head Hydraulic Transmissivity(In- been gathered and is available on Material • Apply Bituthene System 4000 Membrane Plane Flow) of Geotextiles and Geotextile Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). All users should only in dry weather when air and surface Related Products acquaint themselves with this information. temperatures are above 25 degrees F SPEC-DATA'and MANU-SPEC are registered trademarks of Reed Osevier Inc.The ten part SPEC-DATA format conforms to the editorial style Reed 1(1R4T rGisRC£� of The Construction Spedtifications Institute and b used with their permission.The monufocturer is responsible for technical accuracy.02007 Reed Construction Data,All Rights Reserved. Construct ion data P E C SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 Grace Construction Products 4000 Waterproofing Membrane.Its VOC con- Regulations limit the VOC content in products tent is 125 g/L, classified as Architectural Coatings, Refer to RACE Bituthene 3000 and Bituthene Low Technical Letters on manufacturer's website Temperature Membranes are factory made for the most current list of allowable limits. composites with a thickness of 0.060" Bituthene Primer WP-3000 is a water based Construction Products (1.5 mm). These products consist of 0.056" latex primer used to prime all concrete, (1.4 mm) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt masonry and wood surfaces,Its VOC content 1. Product Name and 0.004" (0.1 mm) of cross-laminated, high is 110 g/L. • Bituthene®Waterproofing Systems densi ty polyethylene • Hydroduct®Drainage Composites film. Bituthene Primer B2 is a black,rubber based Hydroduct drainage composites consist of primer in solvent used to prime all concrete, dimpled,high impact polystyrene cores and fil- masonry and wood surfaces. In addition, its 2. Manufacturer ter fabrics designed to provide positive patented formulation promotes the adhesion Grace Construction Products drainage and membrane protection.The VOC of Bituthene membranes to green concrete 62 Whittemore Avenue content of all Hydroduct products is 0 g/L, and damp surfaces. Its VOC content is 440 Cambridge,MA 02140 Hydroduct 220 Drainage Composite is used g/L, (866)333-3SBM(3726) for vertical applications over Bituthene water- Bituthene Deck Prep8 Surface Treatment is Fax: (617)498-4311 proofing membranes, a low viscosity, 2-component, asphalt-modi- www.graceconstruction.com Hydroduct 660 Drainage Composite is used fied coating used to smooth and level rough for all horizontal applications. decks prior to installing the Bituthene water- 3. Product Description Hydroduct 200 is intended for areas which proofing membrane.Its VOC content is 10 g/L. BASIC USE are not waterproofed. Hydroduct 225 Bituthene Liquid Membrane is a 2-compo- Bituthene® waterproofing systems and Drainage Composite incorporates a molded nent,cold applied trowel grade waterproof- Hydroduct@ drainage composites are used in polyvinyl chloride core and is intended for ing material used to flash corners,form fillets positive-side waterproofing applications over areas requiring heat or hydrocarbon resist- and detail hard-to-reach areas.Its VOC con- go concrete, masonry and wood surfaces. They ance. tent is 10 g/L. are used in new construction and retrofit appli- COMPATIBILITY Bituthene Mastic is a rubberized asphalt cations, Typical applications include founda- Apply waterproofing membrane directly to based mastic used to seal membrane tion walls, tunnels, earth sheltered structures, structural surfaces.Bituthene membranes can terminations.Its VOC content is 200 g/L. and split slab construction such as plaza areas be used over EPS wall forming systems if the Hydroduct Tape is a 2-sided,highly aggres- and parking decks. Interior uses include additional guidelines in Technical Letter 18, sive adhesive tape that is specially formulat- mechanical rooms,laboratories and kitchens, "Insulated Wali Forming Systems,' are fol- ed to adhere Hydroduct drainage compos- COMPOSITION&MATERIALS lowed. ices or expanded or extruded polystyrene Bituthene membranes are compatible with protection board to the membrane: Its VOC The Bituthene waterproofing systems consist p content is 61 g/L. of several waterproofing membranes and aged asphalt and coal tar products. compatible accessory products and are Bituthene membranes are incompatible LIMITATIONS complemented by the use of the appropriate with creosote, pentachlorophenol, linseed oil Do not apply Bituthene membranes in areas Hydroduct drainage composite. and materials containing polysulfide polymer. where they will be permanently exposed to The Bituthene membranes are available in The rubberized asphalt component of sunlight,weather or traffic: ilp rolls, interwound with a disposable silicone Bituthene membranes is not compatible with Bituthene membranes are not recom- treated release sheet. The volatile organic flexible PVC or rubber sheet membranes. mended as pond liners or as tank liners compound (VOC) content of all Bituthene Do not apply Bituthene membranes over except when installed between 2 concrete membranes is 0 g/L. materials containing petroleum solvents,fuels slabs. RIF Bituthene System 4000 Waterproofing or oils.Joint sealants containing solvents must Bituthene strips over joints in T-beam struc- Membrane is a factory made composite with be fully cured prior to Bituthene membrane Lures will not provide complete waterproof- ' a thickness of 0.060" (1.5 mm) consisting of application. Refer to Technical Letter 10, ing. For these structures, 9" (225 mm) strips 0,004" (0.1 mm) of cross-laminated poly- "Chemical Compatibility with Other over properly cured and sealed joints, fol- !' ethylene film and 0.056" (lA mm) of self- Materials." lowed by membrane coverage over the adhesive rubberized asphalt. It is specifically Bituthene membranes are compatible with entire surface, are required for a complete formulated for use with the Bituthene System appropriate Hydroduct drainage composites. waterproofing system. 4000 Surface Conditioner and compatible Bituthene membranes are not compatible Bituthene membranes are not intended to accessory products. with certain types of prefabricated drainage be used as a roofing underlayment or flashing Bituthene System 4000 Surface Conditioner systems that damage waterproofing mem- material. is a water based surface conditioner branes when exposed to soil pressures. Use of tile set in thinset mortar is not rec- specifically formulated to prepare concrete, ACCESSORY MATERIALS ommended on surfaces waterproofed with masonry and wood surfaces for the System Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Bituthene membranes unless approved by thinset mortar manufacturer. �. SPEC-DATA'and MANUSPECe are registered trademarks of Peed Elsevier Inc.The ten part SPEC-DATA format conforms to the editorial style Reed I i'i<47 of The Constr uction Specifications Institute and is used with their permission.The monufacturer is responsible for technical accuracy.02007 Reed Construction Data.All Rights Reserded. �"�Construction Data Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Countertop surfaces: ■* 1. Adhesively joined with no exposed open or silicone-filled seams. 2. Provide expansion joints in countertop as detailed on the drawings. 3. Make cutouts to templates furnished by the manufacturer. 4. Reinforce edges and cutouts as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Provide insulation between material and adjacent cold surfaces. 6. Thermally isolate hot applications from cold. END OF SECTION ' .R SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -8 „�, Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 W Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Select from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 1. Color: a. Corian"Burled Beach" B. Finish: 1. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish. a. Semigloss; gloss range of 20-50. go PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 8. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 9. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm)sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. B. Applied sidesplashes: 1. Install applied sidesplashes using manufacturer's standard color-matched silicone sealant. 2. Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using manufacturer's standard color- matched silicone sealant. 3.3 REPAIR SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -7 an Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room we Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Manufacturer's standard one-or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints. B. Sealant: 1. Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone—any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. C. Conductive tape: 1. Manufacturer's standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources. D. Insulating felt tape: 1. Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source. 2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION .� A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. 2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2"wide. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings. .. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. ** c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. B. Thermoforming: 1. Comply with manufacturer's data. 2. Heat entire component. a. Material shall be uniform, between 275 and 325 degrees Fahrenheit during forming. 3. Form pieces to shape prior to seaming and joining. 4. Cut pieces to finished dimensions. 5. Sand edges and remove nicks and scratches. 2.5 FINISHES SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -6 ,., Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Applied. E. Performance characteristics: Property Typical Result Test Tensile Strength 6,000 psi ASTM D 638 -- Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 10-6 psi ASTM D 638 Tensile Elongation 0.4% min. ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength 10,000 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Modulus 1.2 x 10_s psi ASTM D 790 Hardness >85 Rockwell "M"scale ASTM D 785 56 Barcol Impressor ASTM D 2583 Thermal Expansion 3.02 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696 (1.80 x 10-5 in./in./°F) Gloss (60°Gardner) 5-75 (matte—highly polished) ANSI Z124 Light Resistance (Xenon Arc) No effect NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.3 Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z124.3& Z124.6 ., Stain Resistance: Sheets Passes ANSI Z124.3& Z124.6 Fungus and Bacteria Resistance Does not support microbial growth ASTM G21&G22 Boiling Water Resistance No visible change NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.5 High Temperature Resistance No change NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.6 Izod Impact 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. of notch ASTM D 256 (Notched Specimen) (Method A) Ball Impact No fracture 1/2 lb. ball: NEMA LD 3-2000 Resistance: Sheets 1/4" slab-36"drop Method 3.8 12"slab-144"drop Weatherability DE*94<5 in 1,000 hrs. ASTM G 155 Specific Gravity t 1.7 Water Absorption Long-term ASTM D 570 0.4% (3/4") 0.6% (12") 0.8% (1/4") Toxicity 99 (solid colors) Pittsburgh Protocol 66 (patterned colors) Test("LC50"Test) Flammability All colors ASTM E 84, (Class I and Class A) NFPA 255 & UL 723 Flame Spread Index <25 Smoke Developed Index <25 t Approximate weight per square foot: 1/4"(6 mm)2.2 lbs., 12" (12.3 mm)4.4 lbs. Shapes meet or exceed the ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 standards for plastic sinks and lavatories. NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint adhesive: SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -5 am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room 40 Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted. B. Installed Warranty: 1. To qualify for the Installed Warranty, fabrication and installation must be performed by a Manufacturer Certified Fabrication/Installation source who will provide a brand plate for the application. 2. This warranty covers all fabrication and installation performed by the certified/approved source subject to the specific wording contained in the Installed Warranty Card. C. Manufacture's warranty period: 1. Ten years from date of substantial completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer. 4" PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: , a. CorianO surfaces from the DuPont company. 40 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid polymer components ow 1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, .o having minimum physical and performance properties specified. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing. am B. Thickness: 1. 1/2 inch OR C. Backsplash: 1. Applied. no D. Sidesplash: SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -4 no Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. Provide with the following Class A(Class 1)surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Coordination drawings: 1. Shall be prepared indicating: a. Plumbing work. b. Electrical work. 2. Content: a. Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. b. Do not base coordination drawings on reproductions of the contract F documents or standard printed data. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the contract drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. d. Provide alternate sketches to designer for resolution of such conflicts. 1) Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the contract. E. Drawings shall: 1. Be produced in 1/2-inch scale for all fabricated items. F. Drawings must be complete and submitted to the architect within 60 days after award of contract for record only. W 1. No review or approval will be forthcoming. 2. Coordination drawings are required for the benefit of contractor's fabricators/installers as an aid to coordination of their work so as to eliminate or reduce conflicts that may arise during the installation of their work. G. Pre-installation conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1. 1.6 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room +� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements. D. Product certificates: 1. For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. E. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Provide copy of certification number. F. Manufacturer certificates: 1. Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. G. NSF/ANSI standards: +* 1. Refer to www.nsf.org for the latest compliance to NSF/ANSI Standard 51 for food zone—all food types. H. Maintenance data: 1. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. 2. Include in project closeout documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE •� A. Qualifications: 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Applicable standards: 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) d. NSF International 2. Fire test response characteristics: SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -2 ,. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 06651 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types: 1. Countertop surfaces 2. Cove backsplashes B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for Blocking. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 3. Division 16 Section"Wiring Devices." 1.3 DEFINITION A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. b. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. c. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers,waste receptacle and other items installed in solid surface. B. Samples: 1. For each type of product indicated. a. Submit minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. C. Product data: SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 - 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts E. Stairwork and Rails: Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers and securely anchor to supporting substrates. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. Glue and wedge treads and risers to housed stringers. END OF SECTION �w INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 ,0. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room WA Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts No D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Decorative surface of thermally fused polyester or melamine-impregnated web, bonded to specified substrate and complying with ALA 1992. im E. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry"for structural framing lumber. Kiln dry to less than 15 percent moisture content. F. Fabrication, General: Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, before A. shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Im 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating. G. Woodwork for Clear or stained finish: 1. Species: Lyptus. H. Cabinet hardware: 1. Hinges: Pivot style hinges, top and bottom 2. Locks: CompX"Timberline Stock Locks"series I. Woodwork for wainscotting: 1. BR-111 Exotic Hardwood Flooring, "Amendoim", 5/16"x3" engineered, 48" length, aluminum oxide finish. PART III—EXECUTION .� 3.1 EXECUTION A. Preparation: Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation .. areas, and examine and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing, before installing. B. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified above for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade specified above for type 4W of woodwork involved. 1. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). 2. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints, using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler and sand smooth. ** INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. ra B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry." C. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2. Samples of lumber and panel products for each species and cut indicated for transparent finish, and each material indicated for opaque finish, with one-half of exposed surfaces finished. 3. Samples of laminate-clad panel products,for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Samples of thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 5. Samples of solid surfacing materials. ` D. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. E. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet- work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART II -PRODUCTS to 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Grade and species as follows: 1. Wood Species: Poplar. B. Panel Products: As follows: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2., made without formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins. 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 5. Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with requirements of NPA 9. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including back. Apply 2 coats to items installed over concrete or masonry. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Preparation: Before installing woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work and complete as required, including back priming and removal of packing. B. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified above for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade specified above for type of woodwork involved. 1. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. 2. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. END OF SECTION do we EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 o. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 06401 -EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Exterior architectural woodwork includes wood blocking, shims, and nailers unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. B. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2. Samples of lumber and panel products for transparent and shop-applied opaque finishes, IN with one-half of exposed surfaces finished. C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. PART 11—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Grade and species as follows: 1. Wood Species: Cedar, clear, finger jointed—trim, molding, siding. 2. Siding: Cedar, reveal to match existing. OR B. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with NWWDA I.S.4 and the following for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment. 1. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3- iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate(IPBC). 2. Extent of Treatment: Treat each item of exterior woodwork regardless of species from which it is fabricated. C. Nails: Stainless-steel, aluminum, or hot-dip galvanized. D. Fabrication: Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Shop Priming: Shop prime woodwork with one coat of finish specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. D. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 • Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts !I SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART I—GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit Samples for each finish and type of siding and paneling. PART II—PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS !! A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." �► C. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP-1, "Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood." D. Preservative Treatment: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 4 for exterior finish carpentry to receive water-repellent preservative treatment. E. Interior & Exterior Standing and Running Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements: 1. Species, interior: Lyptus. 2. Species, interior wainscotting: BRA 11 Exotic Hardwood Flooring, "Amendoim". 3. Species, interior: Poplar, paint grade. 4. Species, exterior: Cedar, clear, finger jointed. 5. Species, exterior: Cedar clapboard, reveal to match existing. r 6. Refer to drawings for locations and species. F. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or noncorroding aluminum. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours. B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section'Painting." FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 P, Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts D. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying with ASTM E 1677, Type I. ' 1. Products: a. Tyvek E. Sill-Sealer: Glass-fiber insulation, 1-inch (25-mm)thick, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). F. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: APA AFG-01. G. Concrete-filled pipe columns: 16 gauge steel pipe fabricated with concrete fill, 3000 psi minimum. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for PIP attaching other construction. B. Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2305.2 Fastening Schedule in the Massachusetts State Building Code C. Fastening Methods: Comply with recommendations and"Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K and the following: 1. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing. 2. Sheathing: Nail to framing. 3. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, "■' that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by comprehensive testing. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Allowable design values determined according to ASTM D 5456. 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2850 psi (19.7 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-)depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 MPa). 2.5 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Wall Sheathing: 1. Plywood: Exterior, Structural I B. Roof Sheathing: 1. Plywood: Exterior, Structural I C. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. D. Underlayment: 1. Plywood for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1 Underlayment with fully sanded face. 2. Plywood for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick, for ceramic the set in organic adhesive or epoxy mortar. 3. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1 S; with back side sanded. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153. 1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel of structural capacity, type, and size indicated. C. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Model code evaluation reports for treated wood, engineered wood products, and building wrap. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, 15 percent maximum moisture content for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness or less, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building W code in effect for Project. C. Wood Structural Panels: DOC PS 2. Provide plywood complying with DOC PS 1, where plywood is indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K. 2.2 TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA C2 lumber and AWPA C9 plywood, labeled by an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to 19 and 15 percent moisture content, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches(460 mm) above grade. 2.3 LUMBER IMP A. Dimension Lumber: The following grades are per inspection agency indicated: 1. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 3. 2. Load-bearing: #1/#2 Spruce-Pine-Fir: NLGA B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species for nailers, blocking, and similar members. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Shop Drawings showing details of fabrication and installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063-T6. 2.2 FABRICATION op A. General: Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges. B. Fabricate loose lintels from steel angles and shapes. Size to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches(200 mm). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Erect structural steel according to AISC specifications and within erection tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Set base and bearing plates on wedges, shims, levelling plates or setting nuts. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. 4W C. Bolted Connections: Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, unless high-strength bolts are indicated. Snug tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts WIN SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL .. 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings. B. Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," and AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ACCESSORIES A. Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A992, Grade 50 carbon steel. B. Cold-Formed Structural-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 36/A 36M, unheaded rods. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A A325 Grade A(ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); nonhigh- strength carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers, uncoated. E. Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd, rust-inhibiting primer. F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications and tolerance limits of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for structural steel. B. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Shop prime steel to a dry film thickness of at least 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar or to be field welded. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room so Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 5. Colored Mortar: For decorative concrete masonry units, use colored cement or cement- lime mix of color selected. B. Grout: ASTM C 476 with a slump of 8 to 11 inches(200 to 280 mm). 2.3 REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 400). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back units; do not tooth. D. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 CLEANING '" A. Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, clean exposed masonry. 1. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner .. promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 2. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: 1. Samples for decorative concrete masonry units, stone, and mortar. 2. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements. B. Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Sample Panels: Construct a sample wall panel approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification, Normal Weight. B. Loose laid stone wall: Goshen stone. C. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90;Weight Classification, Normal Weight. 1. Finish: simulated stone appearance. a. Cultured Stone b. Coronado C. "Natural stone veneer' 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 3. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts L. Protect concrete from damage. Repair defects in formed concrete and slabs. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 go Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ** Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Slump Limit 5 inches-, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. C. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Do not alter concrete batch in any manner after the transit mixer leaves the batching plant, except as permitted by the mix design requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETING A. Construct formwork according to ACI 301 and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347R limits of Class A, 1/8 inch for concrete exposed to view and Class C, 1/2 *� inch for other concrete surfaces. B. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting .w reinforcement. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, ice, oil, or any other materials that reduce bond D. Place concrete in a continuous form as close to final position, in uniform, approximately horizontal layers, maximum 24 in. deep. E. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, and without segregation of concrete constituents. F. Use compaction and/or vibration equipment to penetrate only the previously placed layer of concrete. G. Do not use compaction or vibration equipment for transport of concrete inside forms. H. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength due to hot or cold weather during mixing, placing, and curing. * + I. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view, coated, or covered by waterproofing or other direct-applied material; rough-formed finish elsewhere. J. Slab Finishes: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. K. Cure concrete for a minimum of 2 days, except as recommended by ACI for Hot- or Cold- weather concrete curing. Curing times may be reduced for concrete with high-early admixtures. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data-concrete mix design. Y, B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer Qualifications: ASTM C 94 C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete"; ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials"; and CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1 or II. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type C or F. Up to 50%of total cementitious materials content. D. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 in concrete exposed to the weather. F. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. G. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.2 MIXES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 03300- 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3.6 LAWN RENOVATION A. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish lawn where settlement or washouts occur or where minor re-grading is required. B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil. C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil. D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing lawn. E. Remove waste and foreign materials, including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. F. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. G. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. H. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns. aw I. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established. 3.7 SATISFACTORY LAWNS A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 3 by 3 inches. B. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-7 no Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ON Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ,. C. Unchanged Sub-grades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. wo 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 112 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 3.4 SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions .•► at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. B. Sow seed at the rate of 2-lb/1000 sq. ft. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:3 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. OR 1. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft.. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. 3.5 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply mulch at a minimum rate of 1500-lb/acre dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. no LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-6 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors. C. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors. 2.8 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. 2.9 PLANTING SOIL MIX A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with soil amendments and fertilizers in quantities required by the topsoil test report. w PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other Aw conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding overspray. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 LAWN PREPARATION A. Limit lawn sub-grade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Sub-grades: Loosen sub-grade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or sub- grade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone, with a minimum of 95 percent passing a No. 100 sieve. .� B. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS w A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. a. State of Connecticut, Department of Environmental Protection approved when derived from food and agricultural residues, animal manures, and sewage sludge. 2. Approved Products: AIIGro, 4 Liberty Lane West, Hampron, NH 03842 (1-800-662- 2440), or equal. *� B. Manure: Well-rotted, un-leached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.5 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. 2.6 FERTILIZER A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 18 percent phosphoric acid. "* B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. 2.7 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week. D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain grass height of 2 to 3 inches. E. Lawn Post-fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds"for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows: Proportion by Weight Minimum Purity Minimum Germination (Percent) (Percent) Percent Kentucky Bluegrass 35 95 75 Creeping Red Fescue 30 98 85 K.31 Tall Fescue 30 98 85 Domestic Ryegrass 5 98 90 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ■. Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. ..a 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. ,. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. .� 1. Spring Planting: April 1 to June 1. 2. Fall Planting: August 15 to October 15. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 1.7 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if • lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. 1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch. Anchor as required preventing displacement. C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. .. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. .r LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 02920-LAWNS AND GRASSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Seeding. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Site Clearing"for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. C. Sub-grade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments, fertilizers, and mulch, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil. F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting. G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920- 1 now Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Place aggregate base and compact with plate vibrator. B. Place geotextile over compacted base course overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). C. Place sand for leveling course to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches(25 to 38 mm). D. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer. E. Set pavers with a minimumjoint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm). If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand-tight against spacer bars. F. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with at least 3 passes of a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500-to 5000-lbf(16-to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. G. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. H. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. No END OF SECTION 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02780-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 02780-UNIT PAVERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Samples for selecting unit pavers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ideal, "Boston Colonial Pavers", color to be determined by Architect from full range of manufacturer standard colors. 2.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel, ASTM D 448, Size No. 8. B. Geotextile: Woven or non-woven polyester or polypropylene. C. Sand for Leveling Course: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve and no more than 10 percent passing the No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface and correct deficiencies before installing unit pavers. B. Cut unit pavers with masonry saw or block splitter. C. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) unit-to-unit offset (lippage) nor 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m)from level or indicated slope. -BED PAVER INSTALLATION 3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING UNIT PAVERS 02780- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Slab Areas: At sub-grade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 square feet or less of paved area or slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. D. When testing agency reports that sub-grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 10 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and re-compact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK 02300-9 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .. Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches below sub-grade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub-grades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch, however, not consistently in one direction. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. ** C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish sub-grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place sub-base course on prepared sub-grade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over sub-base. 2. Compact sub-base and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, •• lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. a. Place material to indicated thickness within 3/4 inch, plus or minus. 3. Shape sub-base and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted sub-base or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted sub-base or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. �* 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing .. agency to perform field quality control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test sub-grades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed .. with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work complies with requirements. EARTHWORK 02300-8 ** Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 go Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final sub-grade. ` G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below sub-grade under pavements and slabs. 1. Install detectable warning tape over non-ferrous piping. 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal so fill 4c material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub-grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact top 12 inches of existing sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches below sub-grade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. EARTHWORK 02300-7 am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll sub-grade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated sub-grades. D. Reconstruct sub-grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION •.� A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Prevent windblown dust. Provide erosion control measures. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of .. remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. .� 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. C. Place and compact initial backfill of sub-base material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. EARTHWORK 02300-6 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Obtain discharge permit for water discharging into storm drainage system or waterway. Remove particulate matter from pumped or drained water which discharges or flows into storm drainage system or waterway. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to sub-grade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: As indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required sub-grade. B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. EARTHWORK 02300-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room ..p Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape .. manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep. C. Identifying Colors for Utilities: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. *■ PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused .� by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect sub-grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub grades, and from flooding or damaging Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect excavations, backfills, fills and sub grades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Provide positive drainage of backfill and fill. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep sub grades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain dewatering until structures, pipes and appurtenances will not be damaged by surface or ground water. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. EARTHWORK 02300-4 *■ Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MHD Spec: Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Massachusetts Highway Department, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact "Dig Safe" before excavating. Proceed with excavation only after utility locator service completes marking of utility locations. 4. Coordinate with Smith College Physical Plant. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be pq removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, clay and other deleterious matter; adequately graded for satisfactory compaction. 1. On-Site Material: Native soil additionally free of masses of roots, individual roots more than 18 inches long and 1/2 inch in diameter, subject to approval by the Engineer. 2. Gravel Borrow: Free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension; MHD Spec, Section M1.01.0. !"! C. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. D. Sub-base: Graded mixture of crushed gravel. 1. Processed Gravel: MHD Spec, Section M1.03.1. E. Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, broken or crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; MHD Spec, Section M1.02.0. F. Bedding: 1. Sand Borrow: MHD Spec, Section M1.04.0, maximum particle size 1/4 inch. 2. Crushed Stone: MHD Spec, Section M2.01.7. G. Trench Backfill: Gravel Borrow, free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; MHD Spec, Section M1.03.0, Type c. EARTHWORK 02300-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .. Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and .. boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cubic yard for bulk excavation or 3/4 cubic yard for footing, trench, and pit excavation, that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted; and that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical OW and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. so I. Sub-base Course: Layer or layers placed between the sub-grade and base course for bituminous concrete paving, or layer placed between the sub-grade and a concrete pavement or walk. J. Sub-grade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of warning tape. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated. Prepare separate reports for each type and application of borrow material. 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557. ,.. 3. Origin of material. 4. Classification and laboratory compaction curve for on-site soil material, in accordance with the above requirements, when requested by the Engineer. C. For Record Purposes. 1. Dewatering Plan: Identify location and duration of system, and process for removing .� particulate matter from pumped or drained water, including copy of discharge permit. 2. Excavation Protection System: Proposed system and design data; including certification by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. EARTHWORK 02300-2 .A we Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 02300-EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing sub-grades for slabs-on-grade,walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Sub-base course for roads, walks, and pavements. 3. Base course for bituminous concrete paving. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 5. When directed by the Engineer, backfilling with additional gravel fill areas excavated of -- buried construction debris and unsuitable material. 6. Disposal of unsuitable material. 7. Disposal of surplus suitable material, if required. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. ! " 2. Division 2 Section "Lawns and Grasses" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill trench, structure or pit excavations. !" 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the sub-base course and bituminous concrete paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated sub-grade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above sub-grade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations as directed by Engineer. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. EARTHWORK 02300- 1 .o Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room op Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 00 3.2 SITE CLEARING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Coordinate removal of any existing plants, trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation with Smith College Physical Plant and Grounds before proceeding. B. Strip topsoil. Stockpile topsoil that will be reused in the Work. 1. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil. C. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. D. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. E. In areas not to be further excavated, fill depressions resulting from site clearing. Place and compact satisfactory soil materials in 6-inch-(150-mm-)thick layers to density of surrounding original ground. F. Dispose of waste materials, including trash, debris, and excess topsoil, off Owner's property. Burning waste materials on-site is not permitted. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02230-2 40 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 o• Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 02230-SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not begin site-clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance. B. Meet with representatives from Smith College Grounds and Smith College physical plant to review scope of work prior to starting work. C. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Protect site improvements to remain from damage. Restore damaged improvements to condition existing before start of site clearing. E. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. F. Protect remaining trees and shrubs from damage and maintain vegetation. Employ a licensed arborist to repair tree and shrub damage. Restore damaged vegetation. Replace damaged trees that cannot be restored to full growth, as determined by arborist. G. Do not store materials or equipment or permit excavation within drip line of remaining trees. H. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 02230- 1 SITE CLEARING ■. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. I. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. J. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES 01740-2 .. w� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01740-WARRANTIES 1.0 GENERAL A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. +� C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. D. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. E. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. F. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion " of its anticipated useful service life. G. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. WARRANTIES 01740- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Lubricants and fuels. 4. Identification systems. 5. Control sequences. 6. Hazards. 7. Warranties and bonds. 8. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following: 1. Startup and shutdown. �w 2. Emergency operations and safety procedures. 3. Noise and vibration adjustments. C. Final Cleaning: Employ experienced cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Complete the following operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass. Remove glazing compounds. Replace chipped or broken glass. 3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the site of rubbish, litter, and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, even-textured surface. D. Pest Control: Engage a licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. E. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities. F. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Remove waste materials and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01700-3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT wo Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 7. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. E. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required. 2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. F. Record Document Submittals: Do not use record documents for construction. Protect from loss in a secure location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference. G. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark the drawing most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give attention to concealed elements. 1. Mark sets with red pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind with durable-paper cover sheets; print titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. w H. Record Specifications: Maintain one (1) copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. I. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into sets of manageable size. Bind in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the .w following information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that .. requires maintenance to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Spare parts, tools, and materials. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01700-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL A. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. B. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following: 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show one hundred percent (100%) completion for the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion and an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Changeover locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 7. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance personnel. Remove temporary facilities, mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will proceed or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. D. Final Acceptance: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following: 1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation. Include insurance certificates where required. 2. Submit a statement, accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final settlement statement. 01700- 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider a request for substitution when one (1)or more of the following conditions are satisfied. Otherwise, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Changes are in keeping with the intent of the Contract Documents. 3. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the specified product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly. 4. The request is related to an"or-equal"clause. 5. The substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, or other considerations, after deducting compensation to the Architect for redesign and increased cost of other construction. 6. The specified product cannot receive approval by a governing authority, and the substitution can be approved. B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. 3.0 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -2 W Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01631 -SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 GENERAL A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed after award of the Contract are considered requests for substitutions. The following are not requests for substitutions: el�r 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner. 3. Specified options included in the Contract Documents. 4. Contractor's compliance with regulations issued by governing authorities. B. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution received within sixty(60)days after commencement of the Work. 1. Submit three (3) copies of each request for substitution. Submit requests according to procedures required for change-order proposals. PIN 2. Identify the product or method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. 3. Provide documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions and the following information: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes needed to other Work that will be necessary to accommodate the substitution. "! b. A comparison of the substitution with the Work specified, including performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect. c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and installation PIP procedures. d. Samples,where applicable or requested. e. A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the substitution on Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification that the substitution conforms to the Contract Documents and is appropriate for the applications indicated. h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 4. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information within one (1) week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection within two (2) weeks of receipt of the request. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision within the time allocated. 2.0 PRODUCTS 01631 - 1 SUBSTITUTIONS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 2.0 EXECUTION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of products. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room . , Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 4. Store products to facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. •* 5. Store products subject to damage by the elements aboveground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 2.0 PRODUCTS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name two (2) or more products or manufacturers, provide one (1) of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal," comply with provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning"substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing characteristics required, with or without use of a brand name, provide a product that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements. 5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 6. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. 7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a Sample, the Architect's decision on whether a product matches will be final. Where no product in the specified category matches and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions concerning "substitutions"for selection of a matching product in another category. 8. Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. .. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01600-MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. 1. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature. B. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. D. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two (2) or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected. E. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach manufacturer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. " 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. G. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding construction spaces. Coordinate with installation to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 2. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 3. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Install at locations as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer. Place hay bales lengthwise with ends tight abutting one another. Install bales with bindings located on the sides. 2. Entrench bales 4 inches and backfill. Place backfill toward potential silt source. 3. Secure in place with 2 stakes per bale and insert straw in voids between bales. C. Anti-Tracking Apron 1. Install as indicated. 3.3 DUST CONTROL op A. Apply water and calcium chloride uniformly over the surface when dust becomes a nuisance or when directed by the Engineer. Provide shut-off valve in convenient location on water truck, to allow for regulating water flow. 3.4 EROSION CONTROL MATTING AND SEEDING A. Install as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's wr recommendations. 3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Control System 1. Inspect control system immediately after each rainfall and daily during prolonged rainfall. Make repairs immediately. 2. Remove and dispose of accumulated sediments when sediment reaches approximately one-third the height of the control system, or when directed by the Engineer. 3. Replace control system promptly if fabric decomposes or system becomes ineffective prior to the expected usable life. 4. Maintain or replace system until no longer necessary for the intended purpose. B. Anti-Tracking Apron 1. Immediately remove sediment spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto public right-of- way. 2. Clean or replace stone as required, and as directed by Engineer. W 3.6 REMOVAL A. Remove and dispose of control system after area stabilizes with new growth or as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01572-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts F. Protect catch basins with hay bale filters throughout construction until disturbed areas are stabilized. 1. Remove and dispose of sediment from control structures. w G. Control dust and wind erosion. Control dust to prevent a hazard to traffic on adjacent roadways. Dust control includes sprinkling of water and uniform application of calcium chloride on exposed soils and haul roads. H. Do not discharge directly into wetlands or watercourses where dewatering is necessary. ..� Utilize methods and devices as permitted by authorities having jurisdiction and appropriate regulations to minimize and retain suspended solids including pumping water into a temporary sedimentation bowl, providing surge protection at inlet and outlet of pumps, floating pump intake. •� 1. If pumping operation results in turbidity problems, stop pumping until means of controlling turbidity are determined and implemented. I. Where control measures are required for longer than 60 days, use silt fence instead of hay bales. J. Within 7 days of completing slope construction, stabilize slopes with vegetation or matting to minimize exposure. K. Stockpiles •• 1. Side Slopes: 2:1 maximum. 2. Surround stockpiles by a sediment barrier. 3. Stabilize stockpiles left bare for more than 15 days with temporary vegetation or mulch. L. Final Grading 1. If final grading is delayed for more than 30 days after land disturbances cease, stabilize soils with temporary vegetation or mulch. M. Planting Season for Temporary Vegetation .. 1. March 1 to June 15 and August 1 to October 1. 2. After September 15, stabilize areas with haybale check, filter fabric, or woodchip mulch. 3.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Silt Fence 1. Install fencing at location as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer. Maintain pitch of 2 to 20 degrees, with inclination toward potential silt source. 2. Install bottom 6 inches of fabric by trenching and burying the fabric into the notched ground. 3. Drive posts into ground a minimum of 12 inches. 4. Locate fabric splices at posts only. Provide 6-inch overlap and seal. B. Sedimentation Control Hay Bales EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01572-4 '"" PIN Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts c. Or equal. B. Wooden Stakes: 1-inch by 2-inch minimum, length as indicated. 2.6 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET/CHANNEL LINING IF A. Blanket: Minimum width of 6 feet. 1. Mat: Machine-produced of 100 percent coconut fiber with colored line or thread along outer edges to indicate material overlap limits. a. Weight: 0.50 lb./sq.yd. b. Overlap: Approximately 2 to 5 inches. 2. Top and Bottom Cover: Heavy-weight polypropylene netting with ultraviolet additives to delay breakdown. a. Mesh Size: 0.625-inch by 0.625 inch. b. Weight: 3 Ibs/1000 sq.ft. B. Sew blanket and covers together on 1.5 inch center at 50 stitches per roll width with UV stable polypropylene thread. 2.7 ANTI-TRACKING APRON A. Crushed Stone or Gravel: MHD Standard Specifications, Subsection M2.01.1. 2.8 DUST CONTROL A. Calcium Chloride: ASTM D98, Type 1 or Type 2. B. Water: Potable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Minimize environmental damage during construction. Prevent discharge of fuel, oil, lubricants, and other fluids. Mitigate effects of discharge. B. Install erosion and sediment control measures prior to clearing, demolition or construction. C. Construct erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with standards and specifications of the City of Westfield regulations, and Conditions of Approval as follows: eu� D. Install additional control measures, if deemed necessary by the State, Town, or Owner. E. Implement and maintain the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. Inform parties engaged on the construction site of the requirements and objectives of the plan. Notify the proper City agency of transfer of this responsibility. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01572-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER FABRIC/SILT FENCE *• A. Synthetic Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile, 36 inches maximum height, conforming to the following: .� Properties Requirement Unit Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D4632): 124 (550) Lbs(N) ... Grab Tensile Elongation (ASTM D4632): 15 Percent Puncture Strength (ASTM D4833): 65(290) Lbs (N) Flow Rate(ASTM D4491): 20 Gal/Min/Sq. Ft. UV Resistance(at 500 hours) 80 Percent (Retained strength) (ASTM D4355): .� B. Product and Manufacturer: 1. Harris Silt Fence by Amoco Fabrics and Filters. .� 2. Mutual MISF 1855 by Mutual Industries, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.2 POSTS A. Hardwood Stakes: 1-inch by 1-inch by 42-inch minimum. A. 2.3 SILT FENCE FASTENERS A. Staples, tie wires or hog rings, as recommended by manufacturer. .. 1. Staples: Heavy-duty wire, 1-inch long minimum. 2.4 HAY BALES A. Bales: Hay, weighing 40 to 120 pounds per bale. B. Stakes: Wood, 1-inch by 1-inch by 36-inch minimum. 2.5 BARRIER FENCE A. Fabric: High visibility, orange plastic mesh fence 1. Mesh Opening: 3.25-inch by 1.75-inch. 2. Minimum Roll Width: 4 feet. 3. Temperature Service Range: Minus 40 to plus 200 degrees F. 4. Manufacturer: a. National Wire. b. Conwed. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01572-2 s Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 �. Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01572—EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes furnishing, placing, and maintaining sedimentation control measures as shown on the Drawings, as directed by the Engineer, and where necessary to reduce sediment content of runoff. Control measures are to remain in place until after completion of construction. Measures include the following: 1. Silt fence. 2. Erosion control hay bales. 3. Anti-tracking aprons. 4. Dust control. a. Conduct construction operations and activities to minimize the creation and ±x dispersion of dust. If the Engineer determines that water and or calcium chloride is required for more effective dust control, provide such measures at no additional cost. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 2. Division 2 Section"Lawns and Grasses." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of geotextile fabric. 2. Silt fence. 3. Erosion control blanket. B. Material Certificates: 1. Gravel base. 2. Filter fabric. 3. Erosion control blanket. 4. Calcium chloride. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where "MHD Standard Specifications" is used, it shall mean "Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Public Works, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges." EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01572- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Instruction: The Contractor or his designated waste manager shall provide on-site instruction regarding appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and/or return methods to be used by all involved parties at the appropriate stages of the Project. D. Separation facilities: As appropriate during each stage of the Project, the Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area(s)to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and 1ei clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. E. Hazardous wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated and disposed of according to Local Regulations 1.9 Reporting Required at Time of Invoicing A. Application for Progress Payments: The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment a Summary of Waste generated by the Project. Failure to submit this information shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information: 1. The amount(in tons) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid, transportation costs (if separate) and the total disposal „A cost. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipt, and invoices. 2. For each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, the amount(in tons or cubic yards), the date removed from the job site, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01505-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College .w. Northampton, Massachusetts 4. White Goods (Appliances) 5. Cathode Ray Tubes(CRTs) including computer monitors 6. Metal, Plastic and Glass Containers 7. Recyclable Paper 1.6 Resources for Development of Waste Management Plan A. The following sources may be useful in developing the Draft Waste Management Plan: 1. Recycling Haulers and Markets. An extensive list of Massachusetts haulers and markets for recyclable materials is available on-line at the following URL: http://www.wastecap.org/wastecap/rsd2003. This list is provided for information only and may not comprehensive; other haulers and markets may also be available. 1.7 Final Waste Management Plan A. Once Smith College has considered the draft Waste Management Plan and made appropriate suggested modifications, the Contractor shall submit,within fourteen (14) Calendar days of receiving such suggested modifications, a Final Waste Management Plan, incorporating Smith College's input. The Final Waste Management Plan shall contain the following: 1. Analysis of the proposed job site wastes to be generated, including types and approximate quantities. 2. Disposal options: The name of all landfill(s)and/or incinerator(s) proposed for trash disposal, the respective tipping fee(s)for each of these disposal options including transportation costs, and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfill(s) 3. Alternatives to Landfilling:A list of the waste materials from the Project that will be separated for reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Markets: A list of the market(s)or other on-site or off-site end use(s)that will be used for each material that will be separated for reuse, salvage, or recycling. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: A description of the means to be employed in separating and recycling the materials identified in item (3) above consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities, including the means by which such materials will be protected from contamination. 6. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and hauled to designated markets, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a hauler and removed from the site and later separated for recycling). 7. Cost of Reuse, Salvage, or Recycling. An estimate of the cost, including separation, transportation, and marketing, to reuse, salvage, or recycle the materials identified in item (3)above. 8. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management. Refer to Section 01200-Project Meetings 1.8 Waste Management Plan Implementation ®R A. Manager: The Contractor shall designate a specific party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers in recycling and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project. B. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01505-3 .M Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Alternatives to Landfill Disposal/Incineration: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during the course of the Project, the proposed end use or market for each material, the respective tipping fees for each end use or market *�+ (including transportation costs), and the estimated net cost savings or cost increase resulting from recycling each material (versus landfilling or other disposal), taking into account revenue from the sale of recycled or salvaged materials and tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials. 4. The Draft Waste Management Plan shall include, at a minimum, the materials included in Section 1.5 that are required to be reused or recycled. B. Following the submittal of the Draft Waste Management Plan, Smith College and the architect will review the plan and consider the proposed recycling and waste disposal alternatives Smith College and/or the architect may suggest alternatives to the proposed disposal options in order to increase recycling, reduce costs, or both. 1.5 Materials for Which Recycling Is Required A. Smith College requires that, as a minimum, the following materials must be considered for recycling, salvage, or reuse during this project: 1. Asphalt 2. Concrete, concrete block, concrete masonry units(CMU), slump stone(decorative concrete block), and rocks 3. Asphalt Concrete 4. Brick 5. Paper, including bond, newsprint, cardboard, mixed paper, packing materials, and packaging 6. Cement Fiber Products, including shingles, panels, siding 7. Paint 8. Rigid Foam 9. Glass 10. Plastics 11. Carpet and Pad 12. Beverage Containers 13. Insulation .. 14. Gypsum Wallboard 15. Porcelain Plumbing Fixtures 16. Fluorescent Light Tubes, per Local Regulatory recommendations 17. Green materials (i.e. tree trimmings and land clearing debris). 18. Metals including, but not limited to, stud trim, ductwork, piping, reinforcing steel (rebar), roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. (ferrous and non-ferrous). 19. Soils 20. Wood, including clean dimensional wood, pallet wood, plywood, oriented strand board (OSB), particle board B. The Contractor should be aware that the Commonwealth of Massachusetts has banned the following waste streams from incineration or landfill disposal. These items may not be included in waste destined for incineration or landfills: .. 1. Lead-acid batteries 2. Leaves and Yard Waste 3. Whole Tires CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01505-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 P" Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts r SECTION 01505-CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL " 1.1 Related Sections A. Section 01094- Definitions B. Section 01300-Submittals C. Section 01600-Materials and Equipment 1.2 Description of Work A. This section describes the requirements for the Contractor and all subcontractors to minimize construction waste and debris and to reuse, salvage, and recycle to the greatest extent feasible. B. This section includes a statement of Smith College's Waste Management Goals, requirements for the development of a draft and final Waste Management Plan, a reference to resources to assist in recycling, and steps for Management Plan Implementation. C. This section specifies certain wastes that are required to be recycled. D. This section specifies obligations for reporting to Smith College weights of materials recycled and materials not recycled or reused throughout the project. 1.3 Intent and Waste Management Goals A. Smith College's waste management goals include increased recycling and conservation of materials. B. Smith College has determined that reducing, to the maximum extent practicable, the amount of waste disposed of in this project is a high priority. The Contractor and subcontractors shall take steps to generate the least amount of waste possible by minimizing waste due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as many of the waste materials as economically feasible shall be segregated for reuse, salvage, or recycling, or recycled as mixed debris. In !! " no case shall material be disposed of in a landfill or incinerator where an approved and less costly recycling or reuse alternative exists. Waste disposal in landfills and incinerators shall be minimized and shall be considered the alternative of last resort. D. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop, for the Owner's review and approval, a Waste Management Plan for this Project as described in Section 1.4. 1.4 Draft Waste Management Plan A. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, and prior to any waste removal, the Contractor shall submit a Draft Waste Management Plan to Smith College and Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc. The Draft Waste Management Plan shall contain, as a minimum: 1. A written analysis of the project wastes expected to be generated, by type and approximate quantity. 2. Disposal options: The name of all landfill(s)and/or incinerator(s) proposed for trash disposal, the respective tipping fee(s)for each of these disposal options including transportation costs, and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfill(s). CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01505- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts +aw END OF SECTION As 01500-5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .R 2. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with code requirements for erection of barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. " 3. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates to enclose the entire site or the portion sufficient to accommodate construction. .� a. Provide open-mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth. b. Provide plywood fence, 8 feet (2.5 m) high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100- mm) rails, and preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet(2.5 m) apart. 4. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure of partially completed areas .. of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, and theft. Provide a secure lockup where materials and equipment are of value and must be stored. 5. Environmental Protection: Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways that comply with environmental regulations and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making equipment to hours .. that will minimize complaints. E. Operation: Enforce discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. F. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. Maintain temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid damage. G. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect during excavation. H. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or restore permanent construction delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period. a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. "® c. Replace burned out lamps. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts C. Support Facilities: 1. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions. a. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m)or less with plywood or similar materials. b. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 2. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. on 3. Project Signs: Install project identification and other signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on framing of preservative- treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. Approval by and coordinate installation of signage with Smith College Physical Plant. 4. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is being performed. 5. Waste Collection and Disposal: Collect waste daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. a. Do not hold materials more than seven (7) days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). b. Refer to Section 01505 Construction and Demolition Waste Management for additional Information. 5. Stairs: Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. D. Security and Protection Facilities Installation: Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 1. Temporary Fire Protection: Until permanent facilities supply fire-protection needs, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241. a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers. b. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. c. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. d. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. Return facilities to pre-construction condition at job completion. Clean ` job office and associated spaces at project completion. B. Temporary Utility Installation: As required. Engage the local utility company to install ••� temporary service or connect to existing service as required if unavailable from existing building services. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company and Smith College recommendations. 1. Arrange with company and Smith College for a time when service can be interrupted to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. 5. Temporary Water Service: Install temporary water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction. Maintain service until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize piping prior to use. 6. Temporary Electric Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. Install service underground. a. Power Distribution: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. b. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching to fulfill security requirements and illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 7. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of completed installations not or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. *� a. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. 8. Temporary Telephones: Smith College will provide connection for site telephone, data and fax in the provided field office space. Post a list of important telephone numbers near telephone. Smith College shall provide a telephone and data connection. General contractor responsible for phone, fax and computers. 9. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01500-CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL A. Summary: This Section specifies construction facilities and temporary controls including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. C. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations, ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for r temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." D. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. E. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and procedures performed on temporary utilities. At the earliest time, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. F. Refer to"Smith College's Owner Conditions"for additional requirements. 2.0 EXECUTION A. Smith College shall provide a location on the site for temporary job site office on the premises for the duration of the project. 1. Coordinate with Smith College Physical Plant 2. Additional space may be provided on as needed basis. B. Facilities shall be located where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 1. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 2. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate safely and efficiently. Relocate as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or 01500- 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection and testing. END OF SECTION ww w 01400-3 QUALITY CONTROL Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform duties of the Contractor. F. Coordination: Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. Avoid removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. G. Submittals: The testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection and test to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection or test through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each report to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. ! e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with requirements. I. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. H. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. ..� 1. Each agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION A. Repair and Protection: Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair .. damaged construction. Restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01400-QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL A. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless they are the responsibility of another entity, Contractor shall provide inspections and tests specified elsewhere and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1. Where inspections and tests are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform these services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 2. Where inspections and tests are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. 3. Where inspections and tests are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will engage the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. Payment will be made from the Inspection and Testing Allowance, as authorized by Change es!■ Orders. a. Where the Owner engages an agency to test or inspect part of the Work and the Contractor is required to engage an entity to test or inspect the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless the Owner agrees in writing. C. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 1. The cost of retesting is the Contractor's responsibility where tests performed indicated noncompliance with requirements. D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services include the following: 1. Providing access to the Work. 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests. 3. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. 4. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Delivering samples to testing laboratories. 6. Providing preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 7. Providing security and protection of samples and test equipment. E. Duties of the Testing Agency: The testing agency shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performing its duties. The agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. QUALITY CONTROL 01400- 1 ,. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/2712008 Presentation Room .m Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. 5. Distribution of Samples: Distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. G. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, and manufacturer's field reports required under other Sections of the Specifications. 1. Certifications: Where certification that a product or installation complies with specified requirements is required, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance. a. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. H. Architect's Action: Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and .w return are required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 1. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2127/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. 3. Submittals: Submit minimum four (4) copies; submit six (6) copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and return the others marked with action taken. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, the submittal serves as the final submittal. Fill 4. Distribution: Furnish copies to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Do not OR proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. a. Do not use unmarked Product Data for construction. F. Samples: Submit full-size Samples cured and finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Mount Samples to facilitate review of qualities. 1. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a check of these characteristics, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. Where variations are inherent in the material, submit at least three(3) units that show limits of the variations. a. Refer to other Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar characteristics. b. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be incorporated in the Work. Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. C. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or designated as the Owner's property, are the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from standard choices. The Architect will review and return submittals indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three (3) sets. One set will be returned marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, at the Project Site, for quality comparison. SUBMITTALS 01300-3 06 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room on Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts an 6. Phasing: Show how phased completion affects the Work. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages for each portion of the Work. 8. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each construction area for each portion of the Work. Indicate where each element must be sequenced with other activities. C. Submittal Schedule: After developing the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a .. schedule of submittals. Submit within 10 days of submittal of the Construction Schedule. 1. Coordinate with list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, list of products, and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Date for first submittal. w. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category(Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Date for the Architect's final approval. 3. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and .w the Submittal Schedule to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and parties required to comply with submittal dates. Post copies in the field office. a. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. b. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. D. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. *• 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates and full-size Drawings, submit one correctable, reproducible print and one blue- or black-line print on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by 48 inches (890 by 1220 mm). The Architect will return the reproducible print. a. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. E. Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on several products, mark copies to indicate applicable information. .. 1. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. .�. b. Compliance with trade association standards. SUBMITTALS 01300-2 �. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 , . Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL A. Submittal Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with construction, fabrication, other submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. Transmit in advance of construction operations to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate submittals for related operations to avoid delay because of the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination until related submittals are received. 2. Processing: Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow more time if the Architect must delay processing to permit coordination. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing. a. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 3. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label on each submittal for identification. Provide a 4-by 5-inch (100-by 125-mm) space on the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 4. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately. Transmit with a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the Contractor. 5. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. On the form, record requests for data and deviations from requirements. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with requirements. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Submittal: Prepare a horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of Work indicated in the "Schedule of Values." Indicate estimated completion in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion. 1. Submit within 30 days of the date established for"Commencement of the Work." 2. Prepare the schedule on reproducible media of width to show data for the entire construction period. 3. Secure performance commitments from parties involved. Coordinate each element with other activities; include minor elements involved in the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work. 4. Coordinate with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, payment requests, and other schedules. 5. Indicate completion in advance of Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 01300- 1 SUBMITTALS ow Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .. Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts ON 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous meeting. Review items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion appropriate to Project status. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how to expedite construction behind schedule; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss revisions required to insure subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 4. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Time. b. Sequences. c. Status of submittals. d. Deliveries and off-site fabrication problems. e. Temporary facilities and services. f. Quality and work standards. �• g. Change Orders. 5. Reporting: Distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a summary of progress since the previous meeting and report. 6. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each meeting where revisions have been made. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Meeting Minutes: General Contractor shall be responsible for recording and distribution of Project Construction Meeting Minutes. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect. + 1.2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 1.3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2 .� to Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01200-PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Preconstruction conferences. 2. Preinstallation conferences. 3. Progress meetings. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction. Review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend. a. Participants shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing. c. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. d. Use of the premises. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a conference before each activity that requires coordination with other operations. 1. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation shall attend. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Review the progress of other operations and preparations for the activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Compatibility problems and acceptability of substrates. b. Time schedules and deliveries. c. Manufacturer's recommendations. d. Warranty requirements. e. Inspecting and testing requirements. 3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate actions necessary to resolve problems and reconvene the conference. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled dates. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of the payment request. 1. Attendees: The Owner, Architect, the Engineers and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or future activities shall be represented. Participants shall be authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 1 .m Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts L. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on CSI's 16-Division format and MasterFormat's numbering system. 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications is abbreviated. Implied words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and streamlined language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or .. phrase. M. Copies of Standards: Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. N. Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications A or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research Co.'s "Encyclopedia of Associations,"available in most libraries. O. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. 1.2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 1.3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION A. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01095-REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 1.0 GENERAL A. Definitions: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. "Approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, P lacin 9. anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced,"when used with the term"installer," means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain work must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." ww J. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095- 1 w. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room • Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." F. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction, submit a list of the Contractor's staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. .� 1. Post copies in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installers of major components to inspect substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize the need to uncover completed construction. C. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering to assure protection from damage. D. Clean and maintain completed construction as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction to assure that no part is subject to harmful, dangerous, or damaging exposure. Such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Water or ice. 5. Solvents and chemicals. 6. Abrasion. ,,, 7. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 8. Combustion. END OF SECTION COORDINATION 01040-2 .. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01040-COORDINATION 1.0 GENERAL " A. This Section includes requirements for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Cleaning and protection. 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and `"' attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress. Such activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Delivery and processing of submittals. 3. Progress meetings and meeting minutes. 4. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction to assure that operations are carried out with ' consideration for conservation of energy,water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not incorporated in, the Work. E. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 01040- 1 IV COORDINATION am Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .0 Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts G. Construction Change Directive: When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714 instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change. 1. The Construction Change Directive contains a description of the change and designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Time. H. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completing the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data to substantiate Contract adjustments. I. Change Order Procedures: Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Contractor will issue a Change Order on AIA Form G701 for Owner and architect signature. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION ow MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01035-MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Minor Changes in the Work: The Architect will issue instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work on via written memo and accompanying sketch, where applicable. B. Owner-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a description of proposed changes in the Work that require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Time. The description may include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal requests are for information only. Do not consider them an instruction to stop work or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within twenty (20) days of receipt, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change for the Owner's review. a. Include an itemized list of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases. b. Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Indicate the effect the change will have on the Contract Time. C. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When unforeseen conditions require modifications, the Contractor may submit a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Describe the proposed change. Indicate reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Contract Sum and Time. 2. Include an itemized list of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases. 3. Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. D. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. E. Allowance Adjustment: Base Change Order Proposals on the difference between the purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by the measurement of work-in-place. Allow for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. r 1. Include installation costs only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. Prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in work claimed in the Change Orders related to unit- cost allowances. F. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in the allowance, whether for purchase order amount or handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of authorization to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than twenty-one(21) days. 1. Do not include indirect expense in cost amount unless the Work has changed from that described in Contract Documents. 2. No change to indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 40 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01030-ALTERNATES 1.0 GENERAL A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION A. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate #1: Delete pergola and associated CMU and stone veneer piers at Terrace 100TER. Terrace and Goshen stone wall to remain. 2. Alternate #2: Substitute primed and painted wood trim and beadboard wainscotting for natural and stained wood trim and wainscotting at Presentation 101. Cabinet at plan south wall (projection screen wall)to be painted wood with Corian top. 3. Alternate #3: Delete AHU-2, CU-2, and associated ductwork, piping, and wiring. Under this alternate, no central air conditioning will be provided for the second floor. r .END OF SECTION 01030 01030- 1 ALTERNATES Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 w Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal Schedule(preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of licenses from governing authorities. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include the following: a. Occupancy permits. b. Warranties and maintenance agreements. C. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy. g. Final cleaning. h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. L. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner. 4. Certified property survey. 5. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 7. Change of door locks to Owner's access. 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION to 01027-3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ow Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .o Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 40 5. Provide separate line items for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value. 6. Show line items for indirect costs and margins on costs only when such items are listed ow individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. a. Temporary facilities and items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be shown as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. 7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives change the Contract Sum. D. Applications for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as •. certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. E. Payment-Application Times: Payment dates are indicated in the Agreement. The period covered by each application is the period indicated in the Agreement. F. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the 'p form for Applications for Payment. G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry, including notarization and execution by a +.. person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. H. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application. I. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from every entity who may file a lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of lien for the period of .. construction covered by the application. a. Submit final Applications for Payment with final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who may file a lien. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-2 �. Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1.0 GENERAL A. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts. B. Schedule of Values: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. C. List of subcontractors. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. f. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values at the earliest possible date but no later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Include the following Project identification: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. go b. Description of Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value. h. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate evaluation of Applications for Payment. Break subcontract amounts down into several line items. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027- 1 glow Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Prepare and deliver unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is the Contractor's responsibility. Aw 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.0 EXECUTION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects. B. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 01020-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01020-ALLOWANCES 1.0 GENERAL on A. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases installation, are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances are established to defer selection of actual materials and equipment until additional information is available. Additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances required include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. 3. Contingency allowances. 4. Inspection and testing allowances. w C. Division 1 Section "Modification Procedures" specifies procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. D. Selection and Purchase: At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. E. At the Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. F. Purchase products and systems from the designated supplier. G. Submittals: Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfilling each allowance. H. Contingency Allowances: Use contingency allowance only as directed for the Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. 1. Related costs for products and equipment ordered under the contingency allowance, including delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, and similar costs, are not part of the Contract Sum. 2. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit. 3. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. I. Inspection and testing allowances include the cost of engaging inspection or testing agencies, the actual inspections and tests, and reporting the results. 1. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting upon failure of previous tests and inspections. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. 2. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the inspection and testing allowance to Owner by Change Order. J. Unused Materials: Return unused materials for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. ALLOWANCES 01020-1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room no Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts kitchenette, combination of Energy Star certified up and down lighting, wiring and connections for new audio-visual system to be provided by the College, connection of building to the College wide steam system, installation of new heating system and radiators, installation of new hot water heater and storage, and installation of new air conditioning system. D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract. E. Contractor Use of Premises: During construction the Contractor shall have full use of premises, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or employ other contractors on portions of the Project. „ F. Use of the Site: Limit use of premises to areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas indicated. 1. Keep driveways and entrances clear. Do not use these areas for parking or material storage. Schedule deliveries to minimize on-site storage of materials and equipment. G. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion. Placing equipment and partial occupancy do not constitute acceptance of the Work. 1. The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each portion of Work occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 3. Mechanical and electrical systems shall be operational and required inspections and tests completed prior to partial Owner occupancy. 4. The Owner will be responsible for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 Pill Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL A. The Project consists of renovation and expansion of an existing presentation room for Smith College Admissions and new adjacent accessible restrooms and kitchenette, construction of a new entry and entry porch, construction of a new brick terrace with dry-laid Goshen stone wall, new and replacement clad wood windows throughout, minor renovations to existing 2"d floor offices and support spaces, and new accessible paved walkways to main and basement entry points. 1. Project Location: 8 College Lane, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts. 2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts. B. Contract Documents, dated "ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008" were prepared for the Project by: 1. Architect: Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc., 136 West Street, Northampton, MA 01060 2. MEP: Lingren&Sharples, P.C., 435 Cottage Street, Springfield, MA 01104-4005 3. Structural: Ryan Hellwig, P.E., 28 Aldrich Street, Northampton, MA 01060 C. The Work consists of renovations and expansion to the existing Smith College Admissions presentation/conference room. New entry and a new accessible bituminous concrete path will be provided to the existing entry point of the building. A new concrete brick terrace with dry laid Goshen stone low wall will be constructed adjacent to the entry. New and replacement clad-wood windows with low-E, insulated, argon filled glazing will be installed throughout the building. The existing presentation room will be expanded to the full width of one half of the building and the adjacent 3-season porch shall be insulated and incorporated into the new room. Two new accessible restrooms, a kitchenette, and a janitor closet shall make up the remainder of the work at the first floor. Structural repairs and installation of new mechanical systems tying into College wide services shall be done in the basement. !' The second floor will have miscellaneous structural repairs as result of work at 1st floor. The second floor shall have blown in cellulose insulation installed in the walls. Existing offices shall receive new paint on walls, trim and ceiling. The existing stair lobby and stairs shall receive new paint and carpet. 1. The Work includes but is not limited to: new reinforced concrete foundation and footings, wood framed weather tight structure, new brick terrace with loose laid ! " Goshen stone wall, new wood pergola with decorative columns at terrace, new wood framed entry with decorative columns, demolition of existing chimney and brick foundation of same, installation of new steel beams and posts, installation of new engineered wood beams, installation of new accessible restrooms and associated plumbing and convenience fixtures, installation kitchenette with bar sink and connections for undercounter refrigerator and coffee maker, installation of wood panelling at presentation room, installation of miscellaneous wood trim throughout, new wood doors and hardware at entry and egress, new panelized wood doors and hardware at interior doors, carpet and/or linoleum flooring as indicated on finish shedule, primed & painted gypsum wall board walls as indicated on finish schedule, new cabinetry at kitchenette, new beamed ceiling at presentation room, new gypsum board ceiling at vestibule, bathrooms and SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 9. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 10. Electrical: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: END OF SECTION BID FORM SUPPLEMENT—PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS 00438-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room .e. Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 5. Gypsum Wall Board: Firm: City/State: .. Alternative Firm: City/State: .. 6. Flooring Firm: City/State: .� Alternative Firm: City/State: .. 7. Painting and coatings: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 8. Plumbing: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: ..a BID FORM SUPPLEMENT—PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS 00438-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2127/2008 ++ . Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 00438 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT—PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS Indicate names of firms proposed for principal portions of Work and change to Base Bid for Alternative Firms. The Contractor attests that the below costs for alternative subcontractors(as approved by Owner) include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance for subcontractor and General Contractor, to provide the finished Work of the types itemized herein. Breakdown category and proposed firm 1. Metal Fabrications: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 2. Architectural woodwork(millwork and casework): Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 3. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 4. Roofing: Firm: City/State: Alternative Firm: City/State: 00438-1 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT—PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts �. Dateof Bid: .................................................. ....................................................................... ....................................................................... (Name of Bidder—Company Name) BY .. (Name of person signing Bid &Title) (Business Mailing Address) .A (City/Town, State and Zip Code) .� Corporate Seal (Business Telephone Number) Note: If the bidder is a corporation, indicate state of incorporation under signature and affix corporate seal; if partnership, give full names and residential address of all partners; and if an individual give residential address if different from business address. END OF DOCUMENT .� BID FORM 00410-4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 212712008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts H. The undersigned Bidder agrees to the following maximum mark-up percentages for overhead, profit and taxes, computed on the total of labor and materials only, for additional work authorized W by the Owner during the performance of the Work. 1. For subcontractors, allow ten percent(10%)on their own work. 2. For the Contractor, allow five percent(5%)on the work of subcontractors 3. For the Contractor, allow ten percent(10%)on Work of his/her own employees. I. The Bidder hereby agrees to commence work on or after receipt of Notice to Proceed or suitable Letter of Intent, to pursue the Work with diligence. Substantial completion should be by August 22,2008.Work must be finalized by no later than August 25,2008. J. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as the Contractor, he will within five(5)days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this general bid and furnish a Performance Bond and also a Labor and Material or Payment Bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Owner and each in the sum of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the Contractor and are included in the contract price. K. The undersigned Bidder agrees to provide, as an integral part of this Bid, a separate attachment entitled"BID FORM, RESUME AND QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT". Attachment shall include Contractor's intended Project Superintendent's resume defining the superintendent's qualifications, and years of experience with Bidding Contractor. L. The undersigned Bidder agrees to provide, as an integral part of this Bid, a separate attachment entitled"BID FORM SUPPLEMENT—PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS" stating names of firms proposed listing portions of Work. M. Labor: The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is able to furnish labor and services that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the Work. N. The Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. O. The Bidder understands the Owner's right to reject any and all bids. P. The undersigned further certifies that under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair, and made without collusion, or fraud with any other person.As used in this document, the word"person"shall mean any natural person,joint venture, partnership, corporation, or other business or legal entity. 00410-3 BID FORM Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .. E. Addenda: The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda, and has taken them into consideration in the preparation of this Bid: Addenda No. dated: Addenda No. dated: Addenda No. dated: Addenda No. dated: F. Alternates: The undersigned Bidder submits the following alternate prices, as described in the Bidding Documents, which are to be added to or deducted from the above stated Base Bid Price, as may be selected by the Owner for inclusion into this Contract. (In the event that an alternate does not affect the contract Price, the Bidder shall remark"No Charge".) Add Alternates Deduct Alternates ForAlternate No. 1: $.......................................... $........................................... ForAlternate No. 2: $.......................................... $........................................... ForAlternate No. 3: $.......................................... $........................................... G. Cost Breakdown of total contract price; (Sum of breakdown equals Proposed Bid Price). „ 1. General conditions and miscellaneous $,.. 2. Overhead and Profit $ .� 3. Sitework $........................................... 4. Concrete $.......:................................... .. 5. Masonry $........................................... 6. Metals $.................... ....................... 7. Wood and Plastics $........................................... 8. Thermal and Moisture Protection $ 9. Doors and Windows $........................................... '�' 10. Finishes $........................................... 11. Specialties $........................................... w 12. Mechanical $........................................... 13. Electrical $........................................... BID FORM 00410-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 00410 -BID FORM Ow BID OF: (Name of Bidder) TO: The Trustee's of the Smith College, herein called the Owner, per the attentions of , . Smith College Physical Plant Smith College 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents, to complete all Work as specified and indicated in the Bidding Documents for the stipulated Contract Price stated herein, and within the time limit indicated in this Bid and in compliance with the Contract Documents and all applicable legal requirements. B. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he or she has visited the site and the conditions present and has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, together with all Addenda issued, received and acknowledged below, and has familiarized himself or herself with the legal requirements (federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations)and other conditions which may affect the cost, progress or performance of Work, and has made independent investigations, deemed necessary by the Bidder. C. The undersigned Bidder hereby offers and agrees to provide all labor, services, products, and materials required in the performance of Work to complete the following named project: Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect and in accordance with the accompanying Bidding and Contract Documents, dated"ISSUED FOR BIDDING, 2/2712008" as prepared by Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc., Northampton, Massachusetts, for the Contract price specified below, subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the Contract Documents. D. The proposed total contract price is: (Base Bid—NOT INCLUDING ALTERNATES) Dollars (total contract price amount in words,which governs) ! ($................................................................................................................) (total contract price amount in numbers) BID FORM 00410-1 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .� general bid a furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials bond as stated in his general bid, the Owner reserves the right to make an award to another Bidder. 1. The thirty(30) day time limit will not apply to a second of subsequent award made after the expiration of the time limit with the consent of said next lowest +*� responsible and eligible bidder and made because the original award made within the time limit was invalid, or because the general bidder fails to execute the general contract or to provide a performance bond and labor and materials or payment bond. 1.14 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS A. Bidders will not be required to provide Performance and Labor bonds for the work of this Contract. 1.15 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK AND TIME OF CONTRACT COMPLETION A. The successful Bidder may begin on-site work on, or after receipt of a written Notice to Proceed, or suitable letter of Intent. After commencement of work, the Contractor .� shall pursue the Work continuously and with diligence. Work may start at the Interior of the project on or about May 12,2008. Work may start at the exterior after May 19, 2008. Substantial Completion shall be scheduled for no later than August 22, 2008 and the Project shall be safe for 1St and 2"d floor office occupancy by August 25, 2008. 1. Substantial completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the work or , designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. This includes any and all permits required by governmental agencies necessary for occupancy and use. END OF DOCUMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-6 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 ► Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. D. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these instructions to Bidders. - 1.11 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS A. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informalities, to reject any or all Bids, to reject a Bid based on attached data required by Bidding documents, or reject a Bid which is any way incomplete or irregular. B. No bid shall be considered which is not based on the Contract Documents. Further, no bid will be considered which contains any letters or memorandum qualifying the Proposal, or which is not properly executed, or which is not accompanied with the requested data and attachments. C. In case of discrepancy between the numerical number and written number, the written number will be controlling and will be considered to be the actual Bid of the Bidder. 1.12 METHOD OF CONTRACT AWARD A. The intent of Owner is to award a Contract to the Bidder whose qualifications and proposed bid sum, are, in the Owner's judgment, in the Owner's best interest. 1. The Owner reserves the right to accept a Proposal other than the lowest bid, to waive all informalities or irregularities in a Bid received, and to accept the bid which in its judgment best serves the interests of the Owner. 2. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. 3. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals,which in his opinion is in his best interest to do so. B. The successful bidder will be notified in writing, by mail or otherwise, that his bid has been accepted and that he has been awarded the contract. 1.13 EXECUTION OF CONTRACTS A. Execution of Agreement: The General Bidder who is selected as the Contractor shall promptly confer with the Owner on any questions concerning major sub-bidders and shall execute an Agreement with the Owner within thirty(30) calendar days after receipt of award of Contract. 1. The successful Bidder will be required to execute AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.' B. Failure to enter into a Contract: If the Bidder selected as the contractor fails to perform his agreement to execute the contract in accordance with the terms of his INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-5 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room *� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .� A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 1. No substitutions will be considered after Award of Contract. 1.9 SUBMITTAL, RECEIPT AND OPENING OF PROPOSALS A. Proposals will be received for the Project by the Owner, as follows: 1. Bid Proposal for the Base Bid, including Schedule of Values and Unit Prices, and qualification attachments will be received by the Owner until date and time stated in the INVITATION TO BID. 2. Any Proposal or portion thereof, received after the stipulated time will be due cause for rejection of Bidder's Proposal. B. Proposal shall be submitted, in duplicate, in a sealed 'bid envelope' bearing the Bidder's name and address for identification. Identify envelope on front face as follows; "Proposal for Presentation Room, Smith College Admissions". w* C. Enclosed sealed 'bid envelope' in an outer envelope to mail or deliver bids; outer envelope shall be addressed: Smith College Physical Plant Smith College 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 D. Facsimile transmitted proposals will be rejected without review. E. No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his proposal or any part thereof for a period of sixty (60)calendar days following date of receipt of proposals. F. Opening of Proposals will be private. Bidders may not be present at time of opening .� of Proposals. 1. A tabulation of Proposals will not be distributed to Bidders. 1.10 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated .� time period following the time and date for the receipt of Bids and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a bid. .w B. Every bid which is not in the form requested, or which is incomplete, conditional or obscure may be rejected by the Owner, if it be in its interest to do so. C. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be .. modified or withdrawn by written notice to the Smith College Physical Plant. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .. 00200-4 PP Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 W_ Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts possession at least seven calendar days before the date set for the receipt of general bids. C. Interpretations of questions raised by bidders, which in the opinion of the Architect require interpretation, and supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda. Oral interpretations given to prospective bidders will have no standing. All addenda will be sent by overnight mail or facsimile transmittal to all who are known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 1. No Addenda will be issued later than three(3) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the time for receipt of Bids. D. It shall be the sole responsibility of bidders to ascertain the existence of any and all addenda issued by the Architect whether or not the addenda is presented or mailed to or received by the bidder. E. As specified under the General and Supplementary Conditions, all addenda issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 1.7 BID FORM A. Bidders shall completely fill-in the Bid Form included. Modify Bid form only as w, specified by Addendum. 1. All blank spaces on Bid Form shall be filled in; numbers shall be stated in both writing and numerals 2. Bidders shall acknowledge all alternates, allowances and addenda where indicated on the Bid Form. 3. Proposals shall include cost breakdowns and all attachments indicated on the sample Bid Form and as required in these instructions to Bidders. 4. Proposals shall be completed without interlineations, alterations or erasures. 5. Completed Proposals shall be signed with legal signature of Bidder. B. Each Bidder's Proposal shall include the following attachments. Bids submitted without ALL of the following items shall be considered incomplete and are subject for rejection. 1. Notarized assurance of Bidder's bonding eligibility on surety company's own letterhead. 2. Resume and Qualifications of Project Superintendent. 3. List of Proposed Subcontractors, stating names of firms proposed for principal !" portions of Work. 1.8 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room +�+ Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 PREBID CONFERENCE A. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled at location, time and date indicated in the invitation to Bid. Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the pre-bid meeting. B. This meeting has been scheduled to: 1. Assist Bidders in understanding the intent of the Bidding Documents. 2. Review with the Architect/Engineer ambiguities, inconsistencies, errors or omissions discovered in the Bidding Documents 3. Provide for identification and discussion of potential problems that may arise • during the administration of any subsequent contract, 4. Provide an opportunity for an examination of the existing structure to the extent reasonably discoverable by nondestructive means, 5. Permit bidders an opportunity to visit the site for determining extent of work, and quantities of materials required for the Work. 1.5 BIDDERS REPRESENTATIONS A. The Bidder by making a Proposal represents the following: 1. The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance with them 2. The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with location conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, together with all Addenda issued, received and acknowledged below, and familiarized himself or herself with the legal requirements (federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations)and other conditions .�. which may affect the cost, progress or performance of Work. 3. The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bid Documents without exceptions 4. The Bidder acknowledges that his or her failure to acquaint himself or herself with the existing conditions and Contract Documents shall in no way relieve the Bidder from any obligations with respect to his or her bid. 1.6 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS A. The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents, examine the site and local conditions and at once report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered B. All questions by prospective bidders as to the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be submitted in writing to the Architect's office and should be in its INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College PIP Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 APPROVED BIDDERS A. The Trustee's of the Smith College, hereinafter referred to as Owner,will receive proposals from a selected list of invited Bidders for renovations to the Presentation Room, Smith College Admissions, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts. Proposals will be accepted only from those Bidders who have been previously selected by Owner. 1. Unsolicited proposals of individuals, partnerships, companies or corporations will not be considered. 1.2 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Owner intends to award a single Stipulated Sum Contract for performance of all work required by the Contract Documents, including General, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Prevention Systems, and Electrical work. 1. Unsolicited proposals of individuals, partnerships, companies or corporations will not be considered. uw 1.3 AVAILABILITY OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Copies of the Bidding and Contract Documents, may be obtained at the Physical op Plant Reception Desk after 12:00 PM LOCAL TIME,WEDNESDAY, FEBRUARY 27th,2008,weekdays Monday to Friday from 7AM to 5 PM at: Smith College Physical Plant PIP Smith College 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 B. Refundable Deposit Required: Cash, check or money order payable to the Owner in the amount of One Hundred Fifty Dollars ($150.00) per set. The deposits will be refunded upon return of the documents in good condition within thirty(30)calendar days after opening of the General Bids, otherwise the deposit shall be the property of the Owner. 1. Upon payment of deposit, General Contractors will receive Contract Documents in the form of two bound sets of prints and two Project Manuals. Bidders shall be responsible for distribution of the Contract Documents.The Owner will provide no additional sets. 2. Additional sets may be purchased directly from the Owner's printer at a non- refundable cost set by the printer. Do not contact Smith College,the Architect,or the Project Engineers for copies of drawings. Printer: New England Blueprint Paper Co., Inc., 302 Locust Street, Springfield, Massachusetts, phone: 413-737-3556 00200-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room +*� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts TOILETS& FIXTURES: Two (2) new accessible bathrooms will be installed at the first floor adjacent entry lobby. .w CODE REVIEW 4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS Structure element Fire resistance Ratings of Structural Elements Type 5B (hours) Exterior wall Loadbearing 0 Nonloadbearing 0 Fire walls and party walls n/a Fire separation assemblies Fire enclosure of exits 0 ref. 780 CMR 3404.13 Shafts Shafts and hoistwa s 1 Mixed use&fire area 2 separation Other separation 1 assemblies Fire partitions Exit access corridors 1 Tenants ace separation 0 Dwelling unit separations '/Z CMR 711.1 Smoke barriers 1 Other non load bearing partitions 0 . Interior load bearing walls, Supporting more than 0 partitions, columns girders, trusses one floor (other than roof trusses)and framing Structural members supporting wall 0 Floor construction including beams 0 Roof construction including beams, 0 trusses and framing, arches and roof deck MEANS OF EGRESS: One existing egress allowable from 2nd floor: • Building is"B-Business" use. Building is less than 3,500 s.f. per floor • Building is not more than 2-stories • There is no more than one-story below the level exit discharge(1't floor) The maximum travel distance to the exit stair is not more than 75'. • There are fewer than fifty (50)occupants on the 2nd floor. Two (2) exit doors are provided for the presentation room: one(1)door exiting to the stair lobby/entrance and one(1)door exiting directly to the exterior. Exit signs and emergency lighting are installed. Two exit stairs are provided from the basement areas. to HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY: A new accessible sidewalk will be provided for"at grade"access to the existing entry door of the building. Two(2) new accessible bathrooms will be installed at the first floor adjacent entry lobby. CODE REVIEW 3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room *� Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Egress width per occupant: (no sprinklers) Stairs= .3 x 44= 13.2" ■• Corridors&doors= .2 x 44= 8.8" Minimum allowed width: corridors, 44", stairs 44" Maximum length of travel: 200' CODE REVIEW 2 .� Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts CODE REVIEW PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The Work consists of renovations and expansion to the existing Smith College Admissions presentation/conference room. New entry and a new accessible bituminous concrete path will be provided to the existing entry point of the building. A new brick terrace with dry laid Goshen stone low wall will be constructed adjacent to the entry. New and replacement clad-wood windows with low-E, insulated, argon filled glazing will be installed throughout the building. The existing presentation room will be expanded to the full width of one half of the building and the adjacent 3- season porch shall be insulated and incorporated into the new room. Two new accessible restrooms, a kitchenette, and a janitor closet shall make up the remainder of the work at the first floor. Structural repairs and installation of new mechanical systems tying into College wide services shall be done in the basement. The second floor will have miscellaneous structural repairs as result of work at 1 st floor and finish work in the"Stair Lobby" and adjacent offices. GENERAL INFORMATION Applicable Building Code: Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, 6m Edition SITE INFORMATION: Project Address: 8 College Lane, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts Parcel Number: Net Site Area: Not applicable. Zoning District: URC Building Footprint: 998 S.F. k' Parking Analysis: No changes to exterior parking. BUILDING INFORMATION: Number of Floors: 2+ basement and attic Occupancy Use Groups: B (offices and conference room) Construction Type: 5B (combustible, unprotected) Fire protection: non-sprinkled Exterior loadbearing wall rating: 0-hr. Exterior non-bearing wall rating: 0-hr. Occupancy separations: 1-hr BUILDING AREA CALCULATIONS Occupancy Use Groups: B Base allowable area: 2 story(30'), 7,200 S.F./floor Existing B area: 1 st floor 998 s.f 2nd floor 811 s.f Total Building Area: 1,809 s.f. Occupancy load: three(3) offices at 2"d floor= 3 occupants Presentation room, max. 40 seats+ 1 presenter=41 Total =44 occupants CODE REVIEW 1 APPENDIX A ASBESTOS SURVEY SMITH COLLEGE, 8 COLLEGE LANE w am Excess Liability am 1,000,000 Each Occurrence 1,000,000 Aggregate go Umbrella Form required unless otherwise agreed. You may substitute a higher amount of general liability coverage in lieu of a follow form umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of general liability coverage as requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of insurance carried, even if it is less than the amount requested. PLEASE NOTE: The following wording must appear on every insurance certificate submitted: The Trustees of Smith College and any present or former trustee, director, officer, administer, employee student volunteer worker or Agent is added as an additional insured to the General Liability Auto Employers, Liability and Excess Policies,as their interests may appear. This insurance shall not terminate without at least twenty-(20) day's prior written notice to the college. Please add the college to all applicable policies as additional insured and instruct your •• insurance agent(s)to forward original insurance certificates directly to: Smith College Purchasing Department 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 And a Copy To: Charlie Conant Smith College 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063-you may fax to (413)585-2398. You will be required to maintain adequate insurance coverage throughout the entire period of your contract or supplier relationship with the college. The insurance agent must provide new original certificates directly to the college whenever new policies are issued or policies are changed or updated. Failure to have or maintain coverage or to provide original certificates may be cause for cancellation or non-renewal or your contract. SMITH COLLEGE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS All contractors who routinely transact business on the Smith College Campus must meet the following insurance requirements: General Liability: 2,000,000 General Aggregate 1,000,000 Product/Completed Operations 1,000,000 Personal&Advertising Injury 50,000 Fire Damage Legal Liability 5,000 Medical Expense Coverage is to include Broad Form Property Damage,XCU hazard(if appropriate), Contractual Liability and be Occurrence Form unless otherwise agreed. Auto Liability 1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Coverage is to include All Owned Autos or Scheduled Autos and Hired Autos and Non Owned Autos. Worker's Compensation Statutory Worker's Compensation Worker's Liability 1,000,000 Disease—Policy Limit 500,000 Disease—Each Employee 500,000 Each Accident (Not required of proprietorships and partnerships,which have no employees, if any employees are subcontracted,coverage will be required, even if the employees are considered"independent contractors". A statement via letter must be provided with the certificates or policy copies stating that the firm has no employees other than the proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of Health Insurance is required of all-sole proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of health insurance is required of all-sole proprietors and partners.) Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room on Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts im Safety: Each Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier is responsible for the health and safety of its own �► workers and for complying with the latest applicable regulations, including, but not limited to those of the U.S. department of labor(OSHA). Each Subcontractor shall issue and enforce the use of all personal protection equipment as required while on-site. The Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier shall comply with all the statutory regulations and requirements including but not limited to the following: ❑ Occupational Safety and Health act of 1970 as amended. ❑ 29 CFR01926 OSHA Hazardous Communications Standards. ❑ State Department of Labor and Industry Division of Industrial Safety ❑ Insurance Safety Requirements/Owner Controlled Insurance Program .. ❑ General Contractor's written safety program. ❑ Local safety regulations. ❑ Hard hats and appropriate personal protection equipment shall be worn at all times while in the designated construction area. Failure to comply and the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier shall be fully responsible for all fines and penalties. Subcontractors and suppliers shall notify the General Contractor of all accidents occurring on the *� job site to persons or property and shall provide the General Contractor with a copy of all accident reports within five days of occurrence. In the event of OSHA fines being charged to this project, the offending subcontractor agrees to w pay that portion assessed against the General Contractor, which was directly attributable to the subcontractors work. ow Code Compliance: Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers will comply with all applicable codes and regulations and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Subcontractor requirements: All Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers require the following items prior to proceeding with any work, or receiving any payments: a. List of subcontractors and suppliers b. Schedule of values. c. Progress schedule. d. List of Contractor's personnel, addresses, telephone numbers and copies of licenses. e. Copies of all permits and permit applications f. Certificate of insurance with the Owner and General Contractor indicated as additionally insured. g. Performance and payment bonds(if required). h. Executed letter of intent, contract or purchase order. i. Executed Owner Control of Insurance Program forms. .. SMITH COLLEGE'S OWNER CONDITIONS 4 4 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts associated with worker and/or environmental protection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor under the Base Bid. In addition, the Contractor is also hereby made aware of the requirement to provide a submittal to the Owner documenting the proper handling, removal and disposal of asbestos and lead containing materials for final payment/closeout. Any other hazards not identified should immediately be brought to the attention of the General Contractor and to Smith College. Keys: The College will provide the General Contractor with the necessary keys if needed for the project. The contractor will sign a key form stating what key or keys are issued to them. It is the responsibility of the contractor to return the keys to the Smith College Project Manager. The General Contractor will receive a copy of the key form, signed by the college that states the keys have been returned. Failure to comply with said terms will result in a charge of$250.00 per key. The college reserves the right to deduct this amount from the final invoice. Loss of master keys will result in the re-keying of the entire building at the General Contractor's expense. Cleaning: The General Contractor will provide dumpsters. All contractors are required to clean their work areas daily. If necessary, the General Contractor will clean at the Subcontractors expense. Substance Abuse: Substance abuse of any kind will not be tolerated and shall be cause for removal from the project or immediate termination of employment. Supervision: Subcontractors are required to employ competent supervisors and field personnel and shall coordinate their work with the work of all other trades. Temporary power: The Contractor will provide necessary temporary lights&power and cover. The Owner will pay for electrical power consumed. Temporary sanitary facilities: The General Contractor will provide portable toilets for the duration of the construction project. The General Contractor will also provide potable water. The Plumbing Contractor will provide temporary connections to the water service for non-potable water usage. The Owner will pay for the cost of water consumed. Telephone service: The Contractor will provide telephone service and be responsible for all associated costs. Hoisting and Scaffolding: The General Contractor or the subcontractors are to provide their own ladders, scaffolding, staging, and hoisting equipment and all the necessary equipment to accomplish their work. Installation of any staging or scaffolding should be coordinated with the General Contractor. Subcontractors and Suppliers: Prior to their work each Subcontractor shall submit to the General Contractor for approval a complete list of all Sub-subcontractors and suppliers that the Subcontractor will employ or purchase from. A Subcontractor is responsible for the compliance of its Subcontractor and/or Suppliers to all terms and conditions of the Subcontract. SMITH COLLEGE'S OWNER CONDITIONS 3 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts treatment rebate. Any local, state, or federal energy rebate programs should also be explored for inclusion with the project. Use of Premises: The General Contractor will control the use of the premises throughout the entire construction project. All subcontractors are to arrange with the General Contractor all deliveries and need for *" storage and office space and coordination of installation of major equipment. The construction workforce is to be restricted to the construction area and the construction limit. Any employee that doesn't adhere to these limits will be terminated. Interruption Requests: 1. All utility (electrical, water, sewer, gas, telephone, hot water, steam and air conditioning) interruptions are to be made during the Owner's defined "off hours" unless other times are agreed to in writing. 2. The General Contractor shall request the Owner's approval a minimum of 72 hours in advance of any utility interruption. There shall be no additional cost to the Owner. �. a) Notify the Fire department of Northampton, Smith College Public Safety and the Physical Plant department of any interruptions to the fire alarm or the fire sprinkler systems. The college will notify the proper insurance carriers of the"out- of-service" condition. 3. The General Contractor shall submit any request that differ from the above to the Owner's project manager a minimum of 72 hours in advance. Some changes may be possible depending on the circumstances and time of the year. Harassment: Harassment of any kind will not be tolerated on this project or on the campus. This includes any inappropriate actions or noises either on the construction site or in the surrounding area. It is strongly recommended that all contractors instruct their employees to limit their contact with college personnel staff or students. Any occurrence of harassment will be cause for immediate termination and possibly removal of subcontractor from the site. The General Contractor will strictly enforce these harassment policies. Noise control: As maintained by Smith College, noise generated by subcontractors must be controlled to a •�► maximum level of 80dB. The city of Northampton also has a noise ordinance which restricts noise before 7 a.m. and after 11:00 PM. Be advised that activities will be restricted if noise levels exceed the allowable limits. a. "Noisy"Tasks: As defined by the Owner's Project Manager, such as concrete " demolition, sawing, or drilling, shall be done during off hours at no additional cost to the Owner, unless other times are agreed to in writing. For the portion of time that the building is still occupied while under construction, it is requested that all ..� of the above mentioned activities take place after 7:00 am. Objectionable Tasks: Operations producing objectionable odors to occupants/users of the project facility/building, such as floor mastic, painting, etc., shall be performed during off-hours, unless other times are agreed to in writing. Known & Unknown Hazards: .. The Contractor shall be made aware that asbestos and lead-containing materials may be present in the existing building in areas to be demolished. Upon discovery, the Contractor shall perform any removal of such materials in accordance with Local, State and Federal Regulations. All costs associated with removal of such materials as well as compliance with all applicable laws SMITH COLLEGE'S OWNER CONDITIONS 2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Smith College's OWNER CONDITIONS Site visit: Any visits to the project site must be scheduled with the Owner a minimum of 24 hours in advance. Acceptance of Bids: The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality in the bidding should it be deemed in the Owner's opinion to be in any way in his best interest to do so. Taxes: This project is exempt from the Massachusetts State sales tax. Certificates will be furnished to all successful bidders. Schedules of work: " Work on this project will begin after May 12, 2008 and its substantial completion will be accomplished no later than August 25, 2008. ON Traffic controls: The General Contractor shall be responsible for paying the Town of Northampton for police details request by authorized agencies or officials. Prior to disrupting traffic flow on a campus roadway and to avoid causing a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles, the Contractor shall arrange for and pay for security details through the Owner's Campus Police office. In all cases, the Owner's Campus Police office shall be the final authority of what activity is a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles. Parking and Deliveries: All contractors will be required to adhere to the college campus parking regulations. If the employees of the contractors receive a Smith College parking ticket for parking in an unauthorized parking space, and did not pay the fine, the college has the right to deduct whatever fines are outstanding form the final payment of the completed job. Lawns: The General Contractor is responsible to take whatever action is necessary to prevent damage to the lawns, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on the college property. The Owner will review the area with the General Contractor before the job starts, to make any notes about the exiting conditions. After the work is completed, the Owner, along with the General Contractor will review the site. If damage has accrued, it is the responsibility of the General Contractor to repair or replace the shrubs, trees, lawns and sidewalks to the satisfaction for the college. Further information about protection requirements may be found within the bid specifications. Insurance: See Owner's Insurance Requirements. Permits: The General Contractor will obtain a building permit. All other required permits will be the responsibility of the respective subcontractors. Copies of all permits, inspection report, and communication with the building department are to be supplied to the General Contractor. Rebates and Credits u Any rebates for purchased items should be submitted for Smith College by the applicable Contractor and to be credited toward the final invoice. For example:W. R. Grace's acoustical SMITH COLLEGE'S OWNER CONDITIONS Site Elevator Contractors Warner Bros. Sunderland, MA Schindler Hartford, CT t T&M Equipment Corp. Springfield, MA Bay State Chicopee, MA Palmer Paving Palmer, MA Otis W. Springfield, MA Marion Excavating S. Hadley, MA Associated Elevator S.Yarmouth, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Dietz Const. Corporation Easthampton, MA Mechanical Contractors Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Harry Grodsky Co. Springfield, MA Karl's Excavating, Inc. Hadley, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA JC&Company Northampton, MA T.J. Conway Springfield, MA Adams Plumbing & Heating, Inc. Adams, MA Landscape Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Sheet Metal Fabricators K.R. Longtin Northampton, MA Kleeberg Sheet Metal Ludlow, MA Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Fisher Sheet Metal Springfield, MA Mt.View Landscapes& Chicopee, MA Berkshire Air W. Springfield, MA Custom Sheet metal Haydenville, MA Miscellaneous Metals Hurley and David Air Springfield, MA Accufab Goshen, MA Arrow Welding Hatfield, MA Automatic Temperature Control ARC Welding Hadley, MA Yankee Technology Ludlow, MA Ralph's Welding Northampton, MA SWE Springfield, MA Fire Protection Allied Fire Protection Springfield, MA • Millwork M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA Westek Westfield, MA. H.F.P. Westfield, MA Amherst Woodworking Northampton, MA Warehouse Mechanical S. Hadley, MA John Carlo Woodworking Westfield, MA Wright Architectural Northampton, MA Electrical Contractors Haydenville Woodworking Amherst, MA Collins Electric Chicopee, MA Laurel Hill (Peter Dellert) Holyoke, MA David R. Northup Electric Agawam, MA Bradford Woodworking Florence, MA T&M Dalton, MA M&S Electric Hatfield, MA Orchard Electric Northampton, MA Roofing Contractors Morris Springfield, MA Communication Contractors Rivet Springfield, MA Hogan Communications Holyoke, MA Titan Chicopee, MA Coughlin Electrical, Inc. Springfield, MA Maheu, Joe-Sm. prof. Granby, MA-467-9581 Pelletier, Al-Sm. Proj. Westfield, MA-532-6346 Environmental Contractors Ernest Peterson Inc. Hartford, Ct Abide East Longmeadow Allied Restoration-flats East Hartford, Ct ATC Associates West Springfield Painting Contractors Flooring Contractors Lococo, Owen Northampton, MA Mercier Carpet W. Springfield, MA Northeast Northampton, MA Landmark Flooring Concept Albany, NY Coffey & Heady Northampton, MA M. Frank Higgins&Co. Newington, CT Callahan, Joe Pelham, MA Ayotte& King Chicopee, MA Novotny Northampton, MA Dion A&Son Flooring Hadley, MA Kitchen Equipment B&G Restaurant Supply, Inc. Pittsfield, MA Kittredge Equipment S i fiel �{c�rrissiod Mmith College Approved Subcontractor List 2006.x1s A.R. Green&Sons Russell Sprague 19 St. James Ave., P.O. Box 1009 Holyoke, MA 01041 413-538-7947 fax 413-534-4798 Wright Builders po Joyce Paige 48 Bates Street Northampton. MA 01060 413-586-8287 40 fax 413-587-9276 Marois Construction Joe Marois 148 Newton Street South Hadley, MA 01075 413-533-1320 Fax-532-1149 Teagno Construction Inc. Don Teagno P.O. Box 2054 228 Triangle Street Amherst, MA 01004-2054 413-549-0803 fax 413-549-2628 Aquadro&Cerruti Inc. Rick Aquadro P.O.Box 656, Texas Rd., Northampton, MA 01061 413-584-4022 fax 413-584-0011 Fontaine Bros, Inc. Dick Romande 510 Cottage Street Springfield, MA 01104 413-781-2020 fax 413-734-1881 Western Builders Paul Ugolini 73 Pleasant Street PO Box 278 Granby, MA 06035 413-467-9171 fax 413-467-9559 SMITH COLLEGE "" Campus Operations & Facilities parking is available at the Smith College Physical Plant lot. This conference is for the specific purpose of viewing the site and clarifying questions by bidders,sub-bidders, subcontractors and suppliers. Proposals shall be received at the office of the Owner's Project Manager until 2PM local time on Thursday,March 13,2007. The Owner,with the Architect present, will open proposals in private. Bidders may not be present at the time of opening of proposals. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids of the General Bidders and to waive any informality in the bids received and to accept the bid which in its judgment best serves the interests of the Owner. Abbreviated bid schedule: Wednesday,February 27—12pm—Three set of plans available for pickup Phys. Plant, ($150 refundable deposit w/self addressed stamped envelope) Checks payable to: The Trustees of The Smith College Tuesday, March 4 - 9am - Contractor site visit, 8 College Lane, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts Thursday,March 13—2pm—Bids due at Smith Phys. Plant By order of The Trustees of The Smith College Northampton, MA 01063 Charlie Conant Project Managers SMITH COLLEGE Campus Operations & Facilities Invitation to Bid " Renovations to the Presentation Room Smith College Admissions 8 College Lane, Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts You are invited to bid on a General Construction Pro j ect entitled: Renovations to the Presentation Room for Smith College Admissions, 8 College Lane, Smith College, Northampton,Massachusetts on the campus of Smith College,Northampton, Massachusetts. The documents have been prepared by: Thomas Douglas Architects,Inc., Northampton,MA. The Work consists of renovations and expansion to the existing Smith College Admissions presentation/conference room located at 8 College Lane on the Smith College Campus. A new entry and a new accessible bituminous concrete path will be provided to the existing entry point of the building. A new brick terrace with dry laid Goshen stone low wall and painted wood pergola will be constructed adjacent to the entry. New and replacement clad-wood windows with low-E, insulated, argon filled glazing will be installed throughout the building. The existing presentation room will be expanded to the full width of one half of the building and the adjacent 3-season porch shall be insulated and incorporated into the new room. Two new accessible restrooms, a kitchenette, and a janitor closet shall make up the remainder of the work at the first floor. Structural repairs and installation of new mechanical systems tying into College wide services shall be done in the basement. The second floor will have miscellaneous structural repairs as result of work at 1St floor. The existing second floor stair landing and adjacent offices will receive new painted finishes. A new carpet will be supplied at the 2nd floor landing and a new runner will be provided on the stairs. Proposals will be receive from a pre-approved list of general contractors. Unsolicited proposals of individuals,partnerships, companies or corporations will not be considered. '! The project will commence after May 12, 2008 and be Substantially Completed by August, 25, 2008. Copies of bidding documents will be distributed by the Owner after 12:OOPM local time,Wednesday,February 27,2008. Three sets of documents will be available at the reception desk on the first floor of the Smith College Physical Plant building, at 126 West Street,Northampton,MA. A $150 refundable deposit and self addressed and stamped envelope is required. Make checks payable to The Trustees of The Smith College. A pre-bid conference will be held at 8 College Lane,Northampton, MA on Tuesday, March 4,2008 at 9:OOAM. Parking is available on Elm Street(Route 9) and additional t Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 VP Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts - DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10520 FIRE-PROTECTIONS SPECIALTIES 10801 TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12— FURNISHINGS 12491 HORIZONTAL BLINDS DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14—CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 15400 PLUMBING 15600 HVAC DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16100 ELECTRICAL op TOC-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts DIVISION 4- MASONRY 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 5- METALS .. 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06551 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07130 SHEET WATERPROOFING 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07841 FIRE STOPPING 07920 JOINT SEALANTS �. DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08711 HARDWARE SETS a. 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09255 GYPSUM WALL BOARD ASSEMBLIES w 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2 Renovations to ISSUED FOR BIDDING 2/27/2008 Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts t TABLE OF CONTENTS Invitation to Bid Smith College Bid List der Smith College Approved Sub-Contractors List Smith College Owner Conditions Smith College Liability Insurance Requirements Code Review DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00410 BID FORM 00438 BID FORM SUPPLIMENT- PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01020 ALLOWANCES 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01030 ALTERNATES 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01505 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01572 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01740 WARRANTIES DIVISION 2-SITEWORK 02230 SITE CLEARING 02300 EARTHWORK 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1 "ISSUED FOR BIDDING, FEBRUARY 27, 2008" t GB� mVW`&_uo a % § QWl080ean \ \ � a ) / , _ SUOISSTWpv 3909apLus-_od U011131wSold , g mpmaa\2y!$Jmoo« gmuW0w \ \ \ \ \ ) K2 §\ 52e . } r < § t § 7 §§ k ui k! | 2 U )� 2 .'s .. m . !| 3 ! { 2 CL � : 2 ■ � ` ��� ( � \/\ � � e « § ^ � w) 3 / 5 ■ ■ 822 ;B. � Z � C ZHXS9Z91:d IId JMQ 09010 VW`uio;duieujjoX H M1Jf Qd-ID21HD oue-I 3931103 8 suo[sslulpy 0213110D uliuis ron9 YK'01MOKMa MEW NOVILOa 961 utoog u011elumi'l 9969-596(9T1)Wl 9991-OU(Ott):INOHd StJf NMV dCl 9immma!m«ac-u9mm �x�gwnrl QaioN sV TWOS ligNNCI,L WVHIS 'ad V31MM V xawawi HDI9XS 80-£I-£0 aivci H9fIO2IHZ NOIIDHS o ao < w w U. Z w > W (n ? _ z w 4. w W J N w a. J J U) z cn N ¢ Q O= w > Oz Z w of LL O 2 W W Q ~ CD O I- UJ IL c ? C/) Z Cl) = 0 = a z0 W CD Z CD C9 � u_ W z z W ,tS > W X X O Q w W w Z 0 w CLW Z CL > ui z z ~ Q W f— U) 2 Q - � o Z n > O J F— w > W U Z CD U) O w g � ° Z W w O C9 U z U)cn C7 Z E- u r z o o w T< 0O ccoowj Y z w Ui � Z O u- J I- Q' - W �- 't > uj U D � Z U z d w a00 o Z � UOw > \� d J W CL 0 ° QJ Z¢T) O W dU Z2cv ! nq� mvw%04d-7A ) » % \ . Qm _ ¥o2o 9o9wS-_A �asoa ; z ; a & \d am ! § \ ) j \ �I� SQy m �±l9�\ } ) / \ ( j k LU U) )� 2 ® z 10 §a § ! §®¥ ;§: < k \ } ) e @ �L - � e e 2 z k:s \ / § 0= 2_ c LU ` ! ® -�j m F$ O §g *}en ƒ ON § , z Lu � /� � ° § „ ± § w k - ! _§ ® / § ■ ■ z §© � ƒ � 7 §; ui LU U U R ( ® m E ! -, C/) 2 Lu § - }d - § §■ lL k = x )( ® - ! _. ) co Ul § 0 � � f z– § LU �| ~ § °\ / Z Z § ;q § , )af|! ®K z PI �z \} E) � �/ $Z ��0 « \/ jee %0 ) ° / i § ! 77 ] d. LU cn OR mT ho� li 09010`vW`ulojd=quotq 8 w O ,.,,.. •�� ,m,..T,,m.., aue7 aBalioo 8 saolssruzpy asa1ioo wcus-uioog aoc;eIuasaid uL'I(l peon 4331a aoold is I 01 suo>:sTAO-d A m Q u a v1 0 0 J J W Q ZU a�- J ? U 03 Z Y S° U N Z�F aZaQ ZH S O= m m N =f -- Q B W+ J K OZ�" �LLN Na3 aW \ U \ owo opt >I-Q NQ3 I�j/ \ \ aao oz= �a \m K a.CL lr I \ \ l \ \ \ I m w Q `bm -o r -o U) 1 CL v N W 7 O]� Y O UO oj� S U o� 0 � � a W WI i \ Y I > A w 3c a N� 3 z 0O ^ Z -O W I O j w Z �OTZ277 I DCn>4 con m �mD�,min —I rzz mmm i �r-z mC)—cn Z0- �0mm(n —^ �D 0th '7— z z I o I I �m --- ��14'-0" _ _ a i aI 0 7 o0 A J w(D ngvz 0—nom _ mw D 3 , �mcn 0 C5 N z o �0 (D O (D ..fa N m C9 00 Z cn 0 CD C7 GD A I W (7 00 @-1—1 M0 rt�L)" 29 m0 w1 o=� o 0 0 050 �I �I � it n m� U) 0 OSp _ -I�-n o, D�2 SDD > K � , I cn N O W IIT-1 I W i w 12 uct \ A ---------------------------t --------------- -- - - -- ------------------------ ---------------- m 0- 0—�N 0M p�9��xWZCn ca � pO=zOFn00C* o c°rt C)r D Kp G)0 - 11 11 rn DDS �D ��GmD�o w M-�,zM /mom ;�ca� p m0 zzzO – -n Zm3DJ0 cn�> 2 m 0 m �0 O M "? o m N 00 j� EQ D EQ \ z / 3'-51/2" 0 6'-7" O 6-7" 3'-51/2" 5'-0" REVISIONS AT FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" REF. 1/A-1.0 ADD 50"D X 6'9"W STOOP AT DOOR 105.FLOOR OF DECK TO BE LEVEL WITH FINISH FLOOR AT PRESENTATION ROOM.PITCHAWAY Q 1/8"PER 12". FLOOR FRAMED WITH P.T.2X8 @ 16"O.C.DECK,STEP AND RISER TO BE PAINTED WOOD.RISERS TO BE 7"MAX TO GRADE(APPROX 3 REQUIRED). REVISIONS AT 1st RENOVATIONS TO: FLOOR PLAN ■ • " ' " ° PRESENTATION ROOM Architects, Inc. 136 West Street,Northampton,MA AD-SK-5 phone:(413)585.0641 fax:(413)582.9882 SMITH COLLEGE ADMISSIONS SMITH COLLEGE The architect:hall h.deemed the authorofthese d—arnentaend.hail tetalnalt 8COLLEGE LANE .nmmon,stet"atoy and other real lights hxmdtno the-pydeht.Any NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS ISSUE: DATE: aneea to these dnawtoos whhwd the wnnen consent of the ardthea shah sad the accuracy of the OVn& ADDENDA a3 3/18/2008 e N n 7J(n Nm I- m Ww ADM r-C In N C ?m N 70 O — 0 DUCTWORK TO z Cl? FOLLOW PROFILE D 11 Z -• "' OF CEILING D j Cl) -i '6 —1 >:Comm JJD2Xm C:C'n 0 cn m—i��� cn -D n m D=z10 Ol�; ,�Dmn rD N X m{gym *r0=CD z Fn N �0m j zzo= —I rn z env ,nm M II �0� DO OD r j 0c�i r" <m== D n=D D N D 0oo mN m 8 t _ _I m rtn mn m � 5 �_0 O zzD r Z mom= N = <r-Z c mrm m <ZD < O Tn D z L7 M Nclmzz rmnpxm� =NN�D DM or- r- c�DW oN n ' D <mZ00 OM m m C-nDm-ni 1 0 0 m UN 2•, 8 't>Z2p �p O 70 70 w V,M, �� m m M r- T1 D 0 0 Z n DUCTWORK TO @ N M r c z r X ; FOLLOW PROFILE 9 Im coil 3 n D m D = furl OF CEILING 3A A-p0C Zn >4 [n D 0 m" D mMM 0 MZ AN O a T n< M 0 ZrODwj p� fn 'n<�ZO K Z Z 1 Fn c D m(D Z = <= "G) m (n )U)r = fn n- D m C m ==>m N w 3ymz n o o fn c cn =10 > 9 mm N Z O D m m ROOF BELOW 0ZmZ D O-n zmf°= 0 0 r�m D y A T D I 0 m 171 n o ATTIC PLAN RENOVATIONS TO: • ' " ° PRESENTATION ROOM Architects, Inc, 136 West Street,Northampton,MA AD-SK-4 phone:(413)585-0641 fax:(413)582-9882 SMITH COLLEGE ADMISSIONS SMITH COLLEGE TM 11 Wad shall to Caamatl tha sum«of lhwa d-111t,.ad shall mill,all 8 COLLEGE LANE _11,stalh,—yantlo th—ftraatlrlyhtslnclWhglhacopytlaht.Any NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS ISSUE: DATE: chanpas to thew EraMnBs wimout lM wrlltan consort of thearchft shaflvdtl maaccur.nofmaplans. ADDEnDA.rz 3/14/2008 a • r r0--1 p r Ng= -n Mm US, m----- m_ O z I D77 DMO-�mm J� 71maW > r 1l1 .._i� n I m p D' n� Z r p m or I D Y EEE EE HE Ilk trE w I I I; it' I i I I A 77 I� f .I li I MI ,I REVISIONS TO WEST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4"= V-0" REF.2/A-2.0 REPAIR WOOD TRIM AT GABLE AS INDICATED. REVISIONS AT RENOVATIONS TO: WEST ELEVATION • • �" " ' PRESENTATION ROOM Architects, Inc. 136 West Street,Northampton,MA AD-SK-3 phone:(413)585-0641 faz:(413)582-9882 SMITH COLLEGE ADMISSIONS SMITH COLLEGE m.—hR.mh.h h.d..tn.d th..uth«onh.w aowm.nes and.hsu nt.m el 8 COLLEGE LANE w,tlriostoty.nd.th.11—d dghH lnolodingth*.Wydght.Any NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS ISSUE: DATE: ch nyutolh.s.dr.vdlp,Mwt th—dtt.n wnssnto/tha srthk. shM vdd the-111 dlh.PI— ADDENDA Yt 3/7/2008 I f I I I I I I I I I I I I M ol c�v�o ;Z - 1'—(1) O_jKrC m mzm� D--j°� rL �_ o °m z O L u ,- ELI LFI o �U) z --Z mcnz M M x=m * m* wz O � L o Z-1 zO z r D �G) D (n°mWCnZ I 7 G)Z z �z I z - O? °D(X�n�o� oM* OO.T m P-D(� D Dz D� Dzz�n in --1 mm m z O 1 z -0 O = 1700>- -1 O �� �XV ° z p rn�m�� r0 (n zm 3-70 i o = 0 -1 IT m r� mD� � _ cmn OOZ m m O= -i M T = f > 0 r- ° 0 r O (n N IJ REVISIONS TO EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" REF.2/A-2.0 PROVIDE NEW COPPER GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT AT EAST AND WEST SIDE OF NEW ENTRY PORCH ROOF.TIE DOWNSPOUT INTO EXISTING STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM. RENOVATIONS TO: COPPER GUTTER AT ENTRY PORCH FOR• PRESENTATION ROOM Architects, Inc. X11 ^/ 136 West Street,Northampton,MA AD-SK-2 t phone:(413)585-0641 fax:(413)582.9882 SMITH COLLEGE ADMISSIONS SMITH COLLEGE The—hg-:he"he de—d the wthorot these docemerds and Shen retell sn 8COLLEGE LANE c oneteturtoq-dotherreswWright einludingmecopydghtAny NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS ISSUE: DATE: ch ngeeto theeednwingswlthout lhewdnen coneentol the erchhed shell vdd the accorsty of the pYns. QOENDA ei 3/7/2008 n (n 2 jl ozin;IVGizI Ot�m3 77 -I Z �x�xnOCm00x0 C)W D0-NiC_t��`LI ��tno 22 D 000 �7J0 AMID X1 0 mm� c�ml0 O m -( x -4 2 0 ! ® 0 N A411 I (n i m ICE'p c N I uzo 002 I 0 z-n D T n 2 I ' I I H1111 I WWDZ ')>C--qM M;r x ZD�O 0 O y m III o<oa-Z WmOGo 0��a O0p N Z 'TI O Z W M-n U)r >00<w KC 3; Zm�; �0'0 0 o xa 2.0 p O O MoD I n m z_-( o OG)i N 2Dfn , n D 00u)K-0 oOS`Z OmFil>> W—fn I REVISIONS TO SOUTH ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4"= 11-0" REF.3/A-2.0 PROVIDE LOCATION FOR BATHROOM EXHAUST VENTS AT SOUTH ELEVATION.MODIFY EXISTING COPPER DOWNSPOUT AND PROVIDE NEW COPPER GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT TO MATCH EXISTING AT NEW BASEMENT ACCESS. RENOVATIONS T0: BATHROOM • "' ' I PRESENTATION ROOM EXHAUST Architects, Inc. LOCATIONS 136 West Street,Northampton,MA COPPER GUTTER AD-SK-1 phone:(413)585-0641 tax:(413)582.9882 AT BASEMENT SMITH COLLEGE ADMISSIONS ACCESS SMITH COLLEGE The erchlled shell be deemed the Who,of these docomenb and shall mash all 8 COLLEGE LANE on ebluslary end otherreserved dphb lncluding the copydghL Arty NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS ISSUE: DATE: ch rages to these drawings 11thwt the wdtteh crosent or the archhed shsllsdd the accorsq d the plans. AODENDA Si 3f712008 • Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Addendum No.4 March 19,2008 ITEM 5 DRAWING H-2.2 Add attached Sketch SKH-3,Mechanical Room Piping Schematic. ELECTRICAL ITEM 1 DRAWING E-1.0 a. Provide dedicated 20 amp circuit at 120 volts to serve duplex condensate return pump set. b. Provide data line and 120 v power feed for temperature controls. ITEM 2 DRAWING E-1.2 Provide dedicated 20 amp circuit at 120 volts to serve CUH-1. END OF MEP ADDENDUM ITEMS Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Addendum No.4 March 19,2008 Renovations to the Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton,MA MEP Addendum#4 Items PLUMBING ITEM 1 SPECIFICATION SECTION 15400 On page 15400-13, Paragraph 2.10 G.REVISE text to read, "Hose Bibb(P-5) 1.Anti-siphon frost proof wall hydrant, Mansfield Model No.478 or approved equal. Provide for 14"thick wall or as required at each installation location." ITEM 2 DRAWING P-1.0 Change location of Hose Bibb P-5.New location to be on the opposite side of the water meter, where the foundation wall jogs to meet the existing porch wall.The revised location allows hose bibb installation directly through the foundation wall without conflicting with the new terrace. ITEM 3 DRAWING P-1.1 Add an exterior Hose Bibb P-5 at the location of Janitor's Closet 100J.Refer to Dwg.A-1.0 for revised location of Mop Sink P-3. HVAC ITEM 1 DRAWING H-1.0 a. Provide refrigerant piping from AHU-1 to CU-1.Pipe W condensate drain from AHU-1 to existing sump in basement. b. Add General Note: Route 1/2"PEX tubing from Headers H-1 and H-2 to each radiator.Tubing shall run concealed on first and second floors.G.C.to provide enclosures where required. ITEM 2 DRAWING H-1.1 Cabinet unit heater CUH-1 shall be Sterling or approved equal,Style F-1020,4.0 gpm,40 MBH, low fan speed,335 cfm. ITEM 3 DRAWING H-1.2 a. Remove one additional radiator in attic,located above Rest Room 200T. b. Add one additional radiator in attic,Type A,7 ft.long,0.6 gpm,fed from header H-2,zone 6. ITEM 4 DRAWING H-2.1 Detail#14,2-Stage Steam Pressure Reducing Station Detail: PRV-1A shall be Spence Type ED,1/2"size, 125 psig to 60 psig,200 Ibslhr. PRV-1 B shall be Spence Type ED,1/4"size,60 psig to 5 psig,200 Ibslhr. Reducers shall be concentric type. Pipe size between PRV's shall be 1". • Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Addendum No.3 March 18,2008 Renovations to the Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton,MA MEP Addendum#3 Items HVAC ITEM 1 SPECIFICATION SECTION 15600 On page 15600-2,Paragraph 1.2 B.REVISE text to read, "The air conditioning system for the second floor(AHU-2,condensing unit CU-2,and associated ductwork and piping)are part of the base bid.For Deduct Bid Alternate#3 these items shall be deleted.Under Bid Alternate#3,no central air conditioning will be provided for the second floor." ITEM 2 DRAWING H-1.2 a. REVISE General Note#1 to read, "Second floor heating and air conditioning is in the base bid scope of work." b. REVISE General Note#2 to read, "For Alternate#3,the second floor air conditioning(AHU-2,CU-2,and associated piping and ductwork)is to be deleted." ELECTRICAL ITEM 1 DRAWING E-1.0 REVISE note at CU-2 to read,"Alternate Bid#3 Delete CU-2 wiring and associated disconnect under Alt.Bid#Y' ITEM 2 DRAWING E-1.2 Clarification:Work shown as Alternate Bid#3 is to be included in the base bid,but deleted under Deduct Alternate Bid#3. ITEM 3 SKETCH SKE-2.0(issued with Addendum#1) The two site lighting posts and fixtures shown on SKE-2.0 will be furnished by Smith College,for installation by the Contractor, END OF MEP ADDENDUM ITEMS W Z g w Lij J � Z W C.) U- c0 N 0 Cr) Q z O � U- 2 O N 0 � � �O � OL =3 Z N OO U- 2 LL O O (S) LO LO z ON N N 0 Q Q O – – O ap 0. n N N — MM � W o ,> N � N � � O C Q J N C a � Um m � , � Um Smith College-Asbestos Survey February 25,2008 8 College Lane Page 6 ATTACHMENT NO.3 ASBESTOS LOCATION DRAWINGS Smith College-Asbestos Survey February 25,2008 8 College Lane Page 5 ATTACHMENT NO.2 NON-ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS The following Table represents non-asbestos containing materials identified during ATC's asbestos inspection. 8 College Lane AW Attic Fiberboard 8 College-OIA&B Attic Blown-In Insulation 8 College-02A, B&C 1 S Floor-Conference Room,1 8 College-03A&B Floor.-Entrance Room Blue&Tan Carpet Adhesive 8 College-04S-A, B,C, D,E, F& Throughout Building Plaster Wall-Skim G 8 College-04B-A, B,C, D, E, F& Throughout Building Plaster Wall-Base G 8 College-05S-A, B,C, D, E, F& Throughout Building Plaster Ceiling-Skim G 8 College-05B-A, B,C, D, E, F& Throughout Building Plaster Ceiling-Base G I"'Floor-Sun Room Sheetrock 8 College-06A&B I Floor-Sun Room Joint Compound 8 College-07A&B Basement Sheetrock 8 College-08A&B 1'ff floor Bathroom Tan Linoleum 8 College-09A&B 1 floor Bathroom Tan Linoleum Adhesive 8 College-10A&B 2r'o Floor Bath Yellow Ceramic Wall Tile Grout 8 College-11A&B 2ff Floor Bath Yellow Ceramic Wall Tile Adhesive 8 College-12A&B 2" Floor Bath Ceramic Floor Tile Grout 8 College-13A&B Basement Chimney Flue Cement 8 College-14A&B Basement Hot Water Heater Exhaust Cement 8 College-15A&B I —Floor-Rear Entrance Seam Caulk 8 College-16A&B Exterior Window Glazing 8 College-17A&B Exterior Window Glazing-Sun Room 8 College-18A&B 1" Floor-Sun Room Carpet Adhesive-Sun Room 8 College-19A&B Basement Window Glazing-Basement 8 College-21A&B I r"Floor Bathroom Brown Linoleum Backing 8 College-23A&B Felt/Mastic under Brown Linoleum 8 College-24A&B 15t Floor Bathroom (Marble Style Throughout Building Paper Under Wood Floor 8 College-25A&B Smith College-Asbestos Survey February 25,2008 8 College Lane Page 4 ATTACHMENT NO. I ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS The following tables summarize the findings of the asbestos inspection performed at 8 College Lane. 8 College Lane Vt Floor—Rear Entrance Carpet Adhesive 10 SF $750.00 15%Chrysottle, Sample Analysis indicated linoleum in sample I"Floor—Bathroom Brown Linoleum 20 SF $750.00 20%Chrysotile,under (Marble Style Tan Linoleum ESTIMATED ABATEMENT COST: $1,500.00 Estimated cost is based on that the asbestos materials are removed at the same time Smith College-Asbestos Survey February 25,2008 8 College Lane Page 3 The following activities should be prohibited without prior written approval and implementation of sufficient engineering controls: • Open Flame Burning • Machine sanding or grinding without localized HEPA exhaust • Use of Paint Stripper containing Methylene Chloride • Abrasive blasting without HEPA localized exhaust • Heat guns in excess of 1100 degrees If you have any questions, please feel free to call me at(413)781-0070. Sincerely, ATC Associates Inc. Edward Kolodziej Senior Project Manager Denis St. Jean Smith College Account Manager Smith College-Asbestos Survey February 25,2008 8 College Lane Paze 2 Asbestos Survey/Results The locations of identified asbestos-containing materials are included in Attachment 1. The locations of identified non-asbestos materials are included in Attachment 2. Asbestos-containing material drawings are in Attachment 3. Laboratory results and Chain of Custodies are included in Attachment 4. The samples were analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) for asbestos in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)"Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Materials" (EPA/600/R-931116). Using the method, a trained microscopist is able to identify and distinguish between asbestos groups and other fibrous materials such as cellulose (paper), mineral (rock), wool, or glass fibers. The quantity of each of these substances is estimated on a weight basis and recorded as a percent. Any material found to contain greater than one percent asbestos by weight, constitutes the material to be considered to be asbestos- containing. The Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (DEP), as well as the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)currently recognize Polarized Light Microscopy(PLM) analysis as an acceptable analytical method for determining the Asbestos content in non-friable, organically bound (NOB) materials. However, comparative studies between PLM analysis and Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) analysis have shown that PLM analysis may yield false negative analytical results for NOB's such as floor tiles. ATC Associates recommends that, prior to Renovation/Demolition activities, one sample from each homogeneous area of mastic and other non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials that originally tested negative by PLM undergo confirmatory analysis by TEM,utilizing ELAP-198.4 TEM Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in NOB bulk samples. Lead Survey—Not Done Materials in the building were not inspected for the presence of Lead. Because of the age of the building, it is prudent practice to assume that the building materials contain Lead. Any work that disturbs lead-containing materials will be subject to OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 "Lead in Construction Regulations". Under OSHA,the employer is responsible for protection of their employees when performing renovation and/or demolition work which disturbs lead materials. Compliance shall include training,exposure assessment testing,engineering controls and personal protective clothing and equipment(disposable suits, respirators,etc.). A lead compliance plan and medical monitoring may also be required depending on the results of the exposure assessment. Any activity that impacts painted materials must be performed in such a way to contain, minimize and thoroughly clean up any and all dust generated by the activity. . (:V %Tc 73 William Franks Drive West Springfield,MA.01089 413-781-0070 Fax 413-781-3734 ASSOCIATES I N C. www.atcassociates.com Engineering Individual Solutions February 25,2008 Mr. Richard Korzeniowski Environmental Health and Safety Coordinator Smith College Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton,MA 01063 RE: Asbestos and Lead Survey Results Smith College,8 College Lane ATC Project#081.10438.0636 Dear Mr.Korzeniowski: Enclosed please find the bulk sample results and summary tables regarding the asbestos survey performed at the above referenced site. ATC Associates Inc. (ATC) conducted an asbestos inspection of 8 College Lane on January 24,2008.This inspection was a limited inspection of all accessible areas of the building. The lead asbestos inspector were Mr. Edward Kolodziej (License #: AI070) and Mr. James Lowell (License #: AI070) who are both EPA-trained and Massachusetts Certified Asbestos Inspectors. Note: The following areas and/or materials associated with the building were not accessible for inspection by ATC. Because ATC could not access these areas or items, it is not known whether or not suspect asbestos-containing materials exist in these areas: • Interior of walls • Above plaster ceilings • Roof • Interior of boilers • In Pipe Chases • Behind Wall Panels • Exterior(with the exception of window glazing) Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Addendum No.2 March 14,2008 MEP Addendum Items HVAC ITEM 1 DRAWING H-1.0 Refer to attached sketch SKH-2 for section view at steam tunnel. ITEM 2 DRAWING H-1.1 Where the 16"x8"supply duct is shown in Presentation Room 101,provide a single access door in the gypsum board soffit,30"x16"or as required for access to operate all volume dampers above the hard ceiling. END OF MEP ADDENDUM ITEMS Additions and Renovations to ADDENDA#2 Chapin House Dining Chapin House Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts simply a 5 1/2", 5" at porch. A:The Presentation room should have matching wood base throughout.The Stair HallNestibule should re-use/salvage existing wood base and provide new, primed and painted wood base of profile and size to match existing where required. 6. Q: S1 detail 2 shows the existing main beam to remain with a new 4x4 post to support it at its end. I have my doubt that the beam actually gets that far; usually they are pocked in the chimney and stop. I think you need a new section of beam. Maybe another post?A: It is our belief that detail 6/S2 should be adequate to capture the end of the existing beam.This detail will be further evaluated in the field when as the chimney is removed and actual bearing condition is revealed. 7. Q: On A3.0 there are only 4 wood blinds noted.I don't see a note that says typical? Are more intended?A:Wood blinds should be provided in the following locations:the windows to each side of the projection screen (labeled 2 on plans),the window to the right of door#105(labeled 3 on the plans), and each of the triple windows in the remainder of the porch (labeled 4 on the plans,4 total sets). Seven(7)total blinds to be provided and installed. 8. Q: 11-1.0 detail 2 Do you want a flashing over the beam?There are two conflicting notes one says 2 x 10 atop 4 x 10 beam the other 6 x 10 beam?Can the beam be laminated?A: Flashing is not required at the top of the beam, only at the ledger.The beam should be 6x10.We would prefer a solid beam to a laminated beam. 9. Q: SKE1.0 has a clouded section with nothing in it. Should something be there? A: The empty cloud indicates the location of a note that was deleted from the First Floor Electrical Lighting Plan. 10. Q:The SKE2.0 shows the electric lines to the post lights, I assume we can take a path that avoids the existing stone wall and step already in poor condition.A:Yes. 11. Q: Has an asbestos survey been completed?Who is responsible for the abatement?A:Yes,an asbestos survey has been completed and is included with this addendum. The College will be handle all abatement. 12. Q:There is no specification for the wood windows,types 1-4 and those labeled replacement("R"). Please provide. A: Smith College's standard windows are by Eagle windows.Windows to be clad wood with painted or stained wood at interior per finish schedule. Glazing to be low-E,argon filled insulated. Colors to be from manufacturer's standard range as selected by Architect. Substitutions only as approved by Smith College Physical Plant. 13. Q: On drawing L-1.0, is the footing for the 16" CMU pier to be concrete or solid CMU? Size?A: The footings will be concrete, 12"thick x 28"square. ADDENDUM SKETCHES: AD-SK-4— ATTIC PLAN • Page 2 THOMAS . • Architects, Inc. Memo To: All Contractors From: Jody Barker,Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc. CC: Charlie Conant, Smith College; Julia Weatherby, Lindgren& Sharpies; Ryan Hellwig Date: 3/14/08 Re: Renovations to the Presentation Room, Smith College Admissions, Smith College, Northampton, MA—ADDENDA#2 ADDENDA#2 Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts RFI: 1. Q:Will the College handling the irrigation system? A:The plumbing contractor will need to coordinate disconnecting and reconnecting the service to the system. The existing water supply and timer clock for the lawn irrigation system shall remain in place and operational during construction as shown on Dwgs. P-1.0 and E-1.0.The General Contractor shall coordinate the schedule for the Owner to relocate existing lawn irrigation heads and piping as required. 2. Q:The third floor is still a bit of a question The H1.2 drawing shows the unico system which is all over the place and there is no third floor layout. If one is available it would help?A: Refer to AD-SK-4. Final details and adjustments will be worked out in the field with GC and HVAC contractor. 3. Q: Door 104 will be a problem as an out swing. Can it be in swing?At 101 it would be better also.A: Doors are egress doors and will need to swing out in the direction of travel. 4. Q: EX1.0 general note states to remove all plaster at the exterior walls.AV detail 2 says patch and match where necessary. Should we strip the interior trim from door 101 (jamb remains)and the replacement window it the stair and change to trim similar to all other new trims in Shaker style?A: Salvage existing trim for re-install. 5. Q:Also I assume we can remove the remaining 10' of base or at least the molding so the entire 1st floor will have a matching wood base as needed.A3.0 shows • Page 1 Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Addendum No.1 March 7,2008 MEP Addendum Items HVAC ITEM 1 DRAWING H-2.1 In Radiation Piping Details,#11 and#12,supply and return shall be shown as 518"o.d.(1/2" nominal)PEX tubing,with 5/8"compression x''/2"NPT Male fittings at connections to panel radiators.Provide manufacturer furnished vertical pipe trim,end cap trim,end trim,and center trim as required to cover piping and tubing. ITEM 2 DRAWING H-2.2 Refer to attached sketch SKH-1 for revised HVAC Schedules. ELECTRICAL ITEM 1 DRAWING E-1.0 There is an existing hanging light fixture near the existing Panelboard EP.Remove and relocate the light fixture to facilitate installation of new ductwork.Reinstall in new location near Panelboard EP after the mechanical work is in place. ITEM 2 DRAWING E-2.1 a. Add photocell on northwest corner of building. b. Control exterior lights through photocell,as shown on SKE-1.0 ITEM 3 DRAWING E-3.0 a. Change the entry for Fixture Type A as follows: i. Description—Jack Ceiling(up facing).Finish to be Clear Anodized Aluminum with Tortoise Glass Diffuser. ii. Remarks—Contractor to order(2)extra glass diffusers.Lamps are to be Sylvania Micro Mini 23W CFL. b. Change the entry for Fixture Type C as follows: i. Description—Clear Anodized Aluminum with Tea Over Opal White Glass Diffuser. ii. Remarks—Contractor to order(2)extra glass diffusers.Lamps are to be Sylvania Micro Mini 23W CFL. ITEM 4 DRAWING E-4.0 a. Change circuiting of exterior lampposts as shown on SKE-2.0 b. Change scale of drawing to 1"=10'-0" END OF MEP ADDENDUM ITEMS Additions and Renovations to ADDENDA#1 Chapin House Dining Chapin House Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts of the framing method of the exterior walls.We will address this issue in the field once demolition is complete at the interiors. 19. Q: There is a piece of crown in need of repair on the south (parking lot) gable. A: Refer to attached AD-3. 20. Q: The new bulkhead wall will require repositioning of an existing downspout.A: See AD-SK-1. 21. Q: No new gutters or downspouts are shown at new roof edges.A: See AD- SK-1 and AD-SK-2. 22. Q:Will any planting requiring moving be the responsibility of the college? Some bushed and shrubs that will be effected.A:Smith College Grounds will do initial removal of specimen plants,trees and shrubbery to be re-used or re- located in the new landscaping. G.C.and their site sub-contractors to coordinate schedule and extent of landscaping to remain or be removed with Grounds and Smith College Physical Plant prior to doing any work at exterior. 23. Q: Recessed screen at Presentation Room (south side) runs perpendicular to the framing joists and will not fit.A: Provide T-6" soffit similar to condition at Presentation room entry (at door 102, plan east side). 24. Q: Subfloor is called out in the resilient sheet flooring specification, but not in carpet?A:Assume new plywood (or eq.)sub-flooring in all locations to achieve a level, even surface throughout.Assume 3/8"thickness. ADDENDUM SKETCHES: AD-SK-1 — BATHROOM EXHAUST LOCATIONS, COPPER GUTTER AT BASEMENT ACCESS. AD-SK-2— COPPER GUTTER AT ENTRY PORCH. AD-SK-3— REVISIONS AT WEST ELEVATION. • Page 4 Additions and Renovations to ADDENDA#1 Chapin House Dining Chapin House Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 8. Q: EX1.0 detail 3 the opening required for the HVAC are incorrectly located as indicated on H1.0. A: Coordinate final locations of openings required for HVAC ductwork in field with Architect and Engineer. 9. Q: S1 detail 2 has a note to VIF ext sill repair. How should we handle this? A: It is difficult to determine the extent of sill repair to be required. Assume the sill along the plan north and plan east sides will need to be replaced/repaired as it is under the existing grade in several locations. 10. Will there be any direction on the floor infill at the existing basement stair or chimney?Can we just use like sizing? A: Use like sizing. 11. Q: Ex1.0 detail 2 On the second floor if we can demo the chimney from above and below can we just leave the existing chimney box in place?A: Yes. If this method can be used, it would be preferred to limit demolition at the 2"d floor. 12. Q: Please try to add some clarity to the third floor expectations for both demo and recovering/insulation. Rip everything out and insulate the slopes and flat then drywall?There is a CI radiator, plumbing vent work as well as electric not to mention the chimney and HVAC. A: Our intent is to keep all work in the attic space to a minimum. Infill the floor space at the removed chimney with framing to match adjacent. Floor to be made level with existing adjacent surfaces—plywood patch would be acceptable.Any patch, repair replacement of wall or ceiling materials to be limited to areas effected by work. Walls and ceiling penetrated by ducts or pipes may be repaired with 5/8"gypsum board. Seal penetrations through roof and floor with appropriate materials. 13. Q: A 1.0 detail 1 Note in porch states rigid insulation but we will be taking out most of the flooring in the porch.This won't lend itself well to rigid and may under the new code require a covering if the access is not covered. It may be possible to blow the floors with cellulose.This is a good application for icynene. A: Provide cellulose or icyene in this location. 14. Q: S2 detail 3 Can the bolts in this application be raised within the joist depth?A:To be determined in field after the actual joists are exposed. 15. Q: On the second floor when the CI radiators are removed,some wall hung. Is there patching of base and casing?A: Assume"patch and match"for existing wall and associated trim at cast iron radiators to be removed and not replaced with new units. 16. Q: Has the insulation fill around the chimney been tested?Zonalite(ok) or Vermiculite (contains asbestos)?A:A hazardous material survey is in progress will be made available by Smith College. 17. Q:The new bulkhead cover appears to sit on the existing foundation which sets flush to the ground. Should this foundation be raised any? Should the framing be PT as it will be within 8"of the ground and structural.A: Provide two(2)courses of 8"CMU at the top of the existing brick foundation. Grout cells solid. Dowel with#5 bar @ 32"o.c. into existing brick 18. Q: Looking at the house It may well be balloon framed? Do we know this as it will require blocking at the 1st floor ceiling once gutted?A:we are unsure • Page 3 Additions and Renovations to ADDENDA#1 Chapin House Dining Chapin House Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts xi. 01400—Quality Control xii. 01500—Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls xiii. 01600—Materials and Equipment xiv. 01631 — Substitutions xv. 01700— Contract Closeout xvi. 01740—Warranties xvii. 06200— Finish Carpentry xviii. 06401 — Exterior Architectural Woodwork xix. 06402— Interior Architectural Woodwork xx. 07620— Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim xxi. 07920—Joint Sealants xxii. 09255—Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies xxiii, 10520— Fire-protection Specialties 3. Specification section "15300— Fire protection"was included in the Table of Contents in error. There will be no sprinkler work required for the project. RFI: 1. Q: Is the sprinkler work all by the college?A: Sprinkler work will not be required in this project. 2. Q: A1.1 Detail 1 notes organic asphalt shingles,there are few manufactures left with organic felts and in this case we'll need to match existing as closely as possible, probably a Certainteed with fiberglass base mat.There is likely to be color difference typical of batch change in manufacturing and discoloration of the existing shingles.A: Smith College's standard organic asphalt shingles are IKO Chateau"Harvard Slate". 3. Q: A3.0 detail 4&5 show wood blinds provided by the college, please confirm?A:The General Contractor will provide and install blinds as specified in specification Section 12491 —Horizontal Blinds. 4. Q:A1.0 finish key refers to the ceiling plan on A1.1 but its both A1.0 and 1.1 A: Correct-finish keys included with plans 2 &3/A-1.0 shall apply to plans illustrated on A-1.0 and A-1.1. 5. Q: A1.0 detail 2 the"B"fixtures are recessed. I assume that the locations will be adjusted to fit within the existing joist bays?A: Correct—locations shown for recessed fixtures are"approximate"and will be adjusted in field. 6. Q: A2.0 detail 3 does not show the bath exhaust.Will blocks be required with aluminum drip caps?A:Yes. 7. Q: EX1.0 and EX2.0 do not appear to show the removal of the continuous windowsill that appears to be gone in A4.0 detail 7.A: Consider demo of the continuous window sill at the former 3-season porch as part of the demo of the existing windows in this location. • Page 2 THOMAS . • Architects, Inc. Memo To: All Contractors From: Jody Barker, Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc. CC: Charlie Conant, Smith College; Julia Weatherby, Lindgren&Sharpies; Ryan Hellwig Date: 3/7/08 Re: Renovations to the Presentation Room, Smith College Admissions, Smith College, Northampton, MA—ADDENDA#1 ADDENDA#1 Renovations to Presentation Room Smith College Admissions Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts GENERAL: 1. The bid date has been extended to March 20, 2008 @ 2:00pm. 2. Several specification sections sent to the Printer did not make it into the specification books (see list below). Corrected specification books have been delivered to the Smith College Physical Plant Wednesday, March 5, 2008. Missing sections will also be available for pickup at the printer—New England Blueprint. a. Missing Sections: i. Smith College Liability Insurance Requirements ii. 00200—Instructions to Bidders iii. 00410—Bid Form iv. 00438—Bid Form Supplement—Proposed Subcontractors v. 01027 —Applications for Payment vi. 01035—Modification Procedures vii. 01040—Coordination viii. 01095—Reference Standards and Definitions ix. 01200—Project Meetings x. 01300—Submittals • Page 1 i i i i k Project Name: Nations to ti sentation Room ith College Admissions -Smith College orthampton, Massachusetts Owner: The Trustees of Smith College . Smith College Northampton, MA Phone:413-085-2400 Project Manager: Charlie Conant Architect: Thomas Douglas Architects, Inc. 136 West Street Northampton, MA Phone:413-585-0641, Fax:413-582-9882 Project Architects: Tom Douglas,Jody Barker MEP/FP: Lindgren & Sharpies, P.C. 435 Cottage Street Springfield, MA Phone:413-732-4336,Fax:413-731-0786 Project Engineers: Dino D'Angelo,Julia Weatherby Structural Engineer. Ryan S. Hellwig, P.E. 28 Aldrich Street Northampton, MA Phone:413-584-4594, Fax:413-585-4593 ApR 1 2008 PROJECT MANUAL